Mazda Automobile 2007 B2300 Truck User Manual
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 1 SESS: 6 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Table of Contents  
Introduction  
4
Instrument Cluster  
12  
Warning lights and chimes  
Gauges  
12  
17  
Entertainment Systems  
19  
AM/FM stereo  
19  
21  
24  
29  
32  
37  
39  
AM/FM Stereo single CD/MP3 system  
AM/FM stereo with single CD  
In-dash CDX6/MP3 disc Premium Pioneer audio system  
AM/FM stereo with CDX6/MP3  
Auxiliary input jack  
Satellite radio information  
Climate Controls  
43  
Heater only  
Manual heating and air conditioning  
43  
44  
Lights  
46  
Headlamps  
Turn signal control  
Bulb replacement  
46  
49  
50  
Driver Controls  
57  
Windshield wiper/washer control  
Steering wheel adjustment  
Power windows  
Mirrors  
Speed control  
57  
58  
59  
60  
60  
Locks and Security  
66  
Keys  
Locks  
Anti-theft system  
66  
66  
70  
1
PAGE: 1 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 6 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 3 SESS: 10 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Table of Contents  
Engine coolant  
Fuel information  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities  
Engine data  
242  
248  
266  
270  
Accessories  
Index  
274  
275  
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical  
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval  
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written  
authorization from MNAO. MNAO may change the contents without notice and  
without incurring obligation.  
Copyright © 2006 MNAO  
3
PAGE: 3 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 10 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 4 SESS: 12 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Introduction  
CIMS #517043  
com_calif-warning  
itdseq=1  
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning  
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and  
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to  
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in  
vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or  
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer  
and birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
CIMS #869811  
com_preface.mazda  
itdseq=2  
CONGRATULATIONS  
Congratulations on acquiring your new Mazda product. Please take the  
time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook.  
The more you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the  
safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it.  
For more information on Mazda and its products visit the following  
website:  
• In the United States: www.mazdausa.com  
• In Canada: www.mazda.ca  
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.  
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available  
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your  
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe  
options before they are generally available.  
Remember to pass on the Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It is  
an integral part of the vehicle.  
WARNING: In the event of an accident the Fuel pump shut-off  
switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the engine.  
The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.  
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel  
pump shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.  
4
PAGE: 4 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 12 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 5 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Introduction  
CIMS #729502  
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION  
Warning symbols in this guide  
com_environ-info  
itdseq=3  
CIMS #958891  
com_handbook-warn.mazda  
itdseq=4  
How can you reduce the risk of  
personal injury to yourself or  
art=expii001_b  
others? In this guide, answers to  
such questions are contained in  
comments highlighted by a bold  
WARNING statement. These comments should be read and observed.  
CIMS #958892  
Warning symbols on your vehicle  
com_warns-on-vehicle.mazda  
itdseq=5  
When you see this symbol, it is  
imperative that you consult the  
relevant section of this guide before  
touching or attempting adjustment  
of any kind.  
art=ctoss542_a  
CIMS #1123266  
Protecting the environment  
com_environ-protect.mazda  
itdseq=6  
We must all play our part in  
protecting the environment. Correct  
vehicle usage and the authorized  
art=expii002_b  
disposal of waste, cleaning and  
lubrication materials are significant  
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this  
guide with the tree symbol.  
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner. Follow  
your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing  
of automotive fluids.  
CIMS #689351  
com_breaking_veh.j14  
itdseq=7  
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE  
There are no particular breaking-in rules for your vehicle. During the  
first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is  
necessary to give the moving parts a chance to break in.  
CIMS #729514  
com_special-note-title  
itdseq=8  
SPECIAL NOTICES  
CIMS #689352  
Emission warranty  
com_emission-warning.j14  
itdseq=9  
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper to Bumper  
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage and Corrosion Coverage. In addition,  
your vehicle is eligible for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance  
Warranties. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not  
covered, refer to the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with  
your Owner’s Guide.  
5
PAGE: 5 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 6 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Introduction  
CIMS #1138947  
com_edr-warning.mazda  
itdseq=10  
Event Data Recorder  
The computer in your vehicle is capable of recording detailed data  
potentially including but not limited to information such as:  
• the use of restraint systems including seat belts by the driver and  
passengers,  
• information about the performance of various systems and modules in  
the vehicle, and  
• information related to engine, throttle, steering, brake or other system  
status potentially including information related to how the driver  
operates the vehicle including but not limited to vehicle speed.  
This information may be stored during regular operation or in a crash or  
near crash event. This stored information may be read out and used by:  
• service and repair facilities.  
• law enforcement or government agencies.  
• the Manufacturer and Distributor.  
CIMS #1066766  
com_elec-cntrls.non-euro  
itdseq=11  
Special instructions  
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic  
controls.  
WARNING: Please read the section Supplemental restraint  
system (SRS) in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.  
Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could  
result in personal injury.  
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats  
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.  
CIMS #80196  
com_utility-notice  
itdseq=12  
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles.  
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.  
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,  
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle  
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.  
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.  
6
PAGE: 6 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 7 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Introduction  
CIMS #1319986  
com_snowplowing.mazda  
itdseq=13  
Using your vehicle with a snowplow  
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.  
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.  
Using your vehicle as an ambulance  
CIMS #1123276  
com_using-ambulance.mazda  
itdseq=14  
WARNING: Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.  
Your vehicle is not equipped with an ambulance preparation package.  
CIMS #1063876  
com_wcr-symbols.mbs  
itdseq=15  
7
PAGE: 7 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 8 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Introduction  
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Safety Alert  
See Owner’s Guide  
Fasten Safety Belt  
Airbag - Side  
Protecting the  
Environment  
Airbag - Front  
Child Seat  
Child Seat Installation  
Warning  
Child Seat Lower  
Anchor  
Child Seat Tether  
Anchor  
Brake System  
Anti-Lock Brake System  
Master Lighting Switch  
Fog Lamps-Front  
Brake Fluid -  
Non-Petroleum Based  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
Fuse Compartment  
Fuel Pump Reset  
Windshield  
Defrost/Demist  
Windshield Wash/Wipe  
Rear Window  
Defrost/Demist  
Power Windows  
8
PAGE: 8 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 9 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Introduction  
Vehicle Symbol Glossary  
Personal Alarm System  
Power Window Lockout  
Feature  
Engine Oil  
Engine Coolant  
Engine Coolant  
Temperature  
Do Not Open When Hot  
Avoid Smoking, Flames,  
or Sparks  
Battery  
Battery Acid  
Fan Warning  
Explosive Gas  
Power Steering Fluid  
MAX  
MIN  
Maintain Correct Fluid  
Level  
Emission System  
Passenger Compartment  
Air Filter  
Engine Air Filter  
Jack  
Check fuel cap  
Speed Control  
Powertrain Malfunction  
Low Tire Pressure  
Warning  
CIMS #604091  
com_info_guide.j14  
itdseq=16  
INFORMATION ABOUT THIS GUIDE  
The information found in this guide was accurate at the time of printing.  
Mazda may change the contents without notice.  
9
PAGE: 9 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 10 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
CIMS #1550353  
mbs_ipanelleft-07  
itdseq=17  
art=mbsip1_b  
Instrument cluster  
Instrument panel dimmer  
(pg. 12)  
control  
(pg. 47)  
Headlamp control  
(pg. 46)  
Turn signal and  
wiper/washer control  
Speed control*  
(pg. 60)  
(pg. 57)  
Driver air bag  
(pg. 91)  
Hood release  
(pg. 229)  
* If equipped  
Parking brake release  
(pg. 160)  
10  
PAGE: 10 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 11 SESS: 4 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
CIMS #1550352  
mbs_ipanelright-07  
itdseq=18  
art=mbsip2_b  
Audio system  
(pg. 19)  
4wd control*  
(pg. 169)  
Passenger airbag  
indicator  
(pg. 96)  
Auxiliary power point*  
(pg. 58)  
Cigar lighter*  
(pg. 59)  
Climate control system  
(pg. 43)  
* if equipped  
11  
PAGE: 11 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 12 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
CIMS #1264223  
com_warn-lights.mbs04  
itdseq=19  
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES  
art=mbsis302_c  
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may  
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may  
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.  
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the  
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, refer to the  
respective system warning light for additional information.  
Check engine: The Check Engine  
indicator light illuminates when the  
art=expis315_a  
ignition is first turned to the ON  
position to check the bulb and to  
indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)  
testing. Normally, the ЉCheck engineЉ light will stay on until the engine is  
cranked, then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present. However, if  
after 15 seconds the ЉCheck engineЉ light blinks eight times, it means  
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing in the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter.  
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board  
Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to On  
board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could  
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid  
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced  
immediately by your authorized dealer.  
12  
PAGE: 12 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 13 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust  
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel  
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components,  
possibly causing a fire.  
Check fuel cap: Illuminates when  
the fuel cap may not be properly  
installed. Check the fuel filler cap if  
this light remains on. Continued  
driving with this light on may cause  
the Check Engine warning light to  
come on.  
art=dnois308_a  
It may take a long period of time for the system to detect an  
improperly installed or properly re-installed fuel filler cap  
depending on driving and fuel tank level conditions. Refer to Fuel  
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
Brake system warning light: To  
confirm the brake system warning  
light is functional, it will  
momentarily illuminate when the  
ignition is turned to the ON position  
!
P
art=dnogf004_a  
BRAKE  
when the engine is not running, or in a position between ON and START,  
or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the ON  
position. If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this  
time, seek service immediately from your authorized dealer. Illumination  
after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a  
failure to brake proportioning and the brake system should be inspected  
immediately by your authorized dealer.  
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning  
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking  
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the  
vehicle. Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer.  
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can  
cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury.  
13  
PAGE: 13 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 14 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
Anti-lock brake system: If the  
ABS light stays illuminated or  
art=dnogf001_a  
art=ranis319_a  
ABS  
continues to flash, a malfunction has  
been detected; have the system  
serviced immediately by your  
authorized dealer. Normal braking is still functional unless the brake  
warning light also is illuminated.  
Airbag readiness: If this light fails  
to illuminate when ignition is turned  
to ON, continues to flash or remains  
on, have the system serviced  
immediately by your authorized  
dealer. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the supplemental  
restraint system has been detected.  
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten  
your safety belt. A BeltMinder௡  
chime will also sound to remind you  
to fasten your safety belt. Refer to  
the Seating and safety restraints  
art=exdis014_a  
art=winis320_a  
chapter to activate/deactivate the BeltMinder௡ chime feature.  
Low tire pressure warning:  
Illuminates when your tire pressure  
is low. If the light remains on at  
start up or while driving, the tire  
pressure should be checked. Refer  
to Inflating Your Tires in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.  
When the ignition is first turned to ON, the light will illuminate for 3  
seconds to ensure the bulb is working. If the light does not turn ON,  
have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. For more  
information on this system, refer to Understanding Your Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter.  
Charging system: Illuminates when  
the battery is not charging properly.  
art=expis017_a  
art=dnois006_a  
Engine oil pressure: Illuminates  
when the oil pressure falls below the  
normal range, refer to Engine oil in  
the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter.  
14  
PAGE: 14 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 15 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
Engine coolant temperature:  
Illuminates when the engine coolant  
art=f12ip034_a  
temperature is high. Stop the  
vehicle as soon as possible , switch off the engine and let cool. Refer to  
Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.  
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the  
engine is running or hot.  
Foglamps: Illuminates when the  
foglamps are turned on. Refer to  
Foglamp control in the Lights  
chapter.  
art=dewii002_a  
art=dnois002_a  
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel  
level in the fuel tank is at or near  
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this  
chapter).  
Door ajar: Illuminates when the  
ignition is in the ON position and  
any door is open.  
art=cgris311_a  
art=expis024_a  
Overdrive off (if equipped):  
O/D  
Illuminates when the overdrive  
OFF  
function of the transmission has  
been turned off, refer to the  
Driving chapter. If the light does not come on, have your vehicle  
serviced as soon as possible, damage to the transmission could  
occur.  
Four wheel drive low (if  
4x4  
LOW  
equipped): Illuminates when  
art=expis340_a  
art=f12ip031_a  
four-wheel drive low is engaged.  
NOTE: If the light continues to  
flash have the system serviced.  
Four wheel drive high (if  
equipped): Illuminates when  
four-wheel drive high is engaged. It  
may also illuminate when the 4WD LOW is engaged, refer to the Driving  
chapter for more information.  
4x4  
15  
PAGE: 15 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 16 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
NOTE: If the light continues to flash have the system serviced.  
Anti-theft system: Flashes when  
the SecuriLock௢ Passive Anti-theft  
System has been activated.  
art=ranis348_a  
art=dewis310_a  
Speed control (if equipped):  
Illuminates when the speed control  
is engaged. Turns off when the  
speed control system is disengaged.  
Turn signal: Illuminates when the  
left or right turn signal or the  
art=exdis005_a  
art=expis021_a  
hazard lights are turned on. If the  
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.  
High beams: Illuminates when the  
high beam headlamps are turned on.  
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the  
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door  
is opened.  
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking  
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the  
driver’s door is opened.  
Door ajar warning chime: Sounds when any door is opened (or not  
fully closed).  
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is  
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5  
km/h).  
16  
PAGE: 16 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 17 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
CIMS #1264222  
com_gauges.mbs04  
itdseq=20  
GAUGES  
art=mbsis304_c  
Speedometer: Indicates the  
current vehicle speed.  
art=ranis341_a  
Engine coolant temperature  
gauge: Indicates engine coolant  
art=ranis343_a  
temperature. At normal operating  
temperature, the needle will be in  
the normal range (between “H” and  
“C”). If it enters the red section,  
the engine is overheating. Stop  
the vehicle as soon as safely  
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.  
Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and specifications  
chapter.  
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap and/or the  
radiator cap while the engine is running or hot, this may result  
in serious burns.  
Odometer: Registers the total miles  
(kilometers) of the vehicle.  
art=ranis345_b  
17  
PAGE: 17 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 18 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Instrument Cluster  
Trip odometer: Registers the miles  
(kilometers) of individual journeys.  
art=ranis346_b  
Press the button once until “TRIP”  
appears in the display (this  
represents the trip mode). To reset  
the trip, press and hold the control  
again for approximately 2 seconds,  
until the trip reading is 0.0 miles (kilometers). To toggle between trip  
and odometer, press and release the control.  
Tachometer: Indicates the engine  
speed in revolutions per minute.  
Driving with your tachometer  
art=ranis344_a  
pointer continuously at the top of  
the scale may damage the engine.  
Fuel gauge: Indicates  
approximately how much fuel is left  
in the fuel tank (when the ignition  
is in the ON position). The fuel  
gauge may vary slightly when the  
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.  
art=ranis342_a  
Proper gauge indication requires the  
ignition to be in the OFF or  
ACCESSORY position during refueling, otherwise correct fuel indication  
after refueling can be slow to update. Also, a minimum of 3 gallons is  
needed for correct indication after refueling.  
NOTE: The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the  
fuel filler door is located.  
Refer to Filling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications  
chapter for more information.  
18  
PAGE: 18 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 19 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
CIMS #1486771  
AUDIO SYSTEMS  
AM/FM stereo (if equipped)  
com_audio-title.06  
CIMS #1239876  
itdseq=21  
com_pionamfm.ran  
itdseq=22  
art=rancf807_b  
Display preference: You can select Clock mode, which displays the  
time, or Frequency mode, which displays the current radio frequency, to  
appear in the radio display. Press CLK repeatedly to toggle between  
Clock and Frequency modes. If clock mode is selected and a radio  
function is pressed (i.e. SEEK, TUNE, Memory Presets), the radio  
information will display momentarily and then again display the time.  
1. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.  
art=rancf831_a  
art=rancf832_a  
2. CLK —To set the time:  
Ensure that your audio system  
is turned off. Press and hold  
CLK until the hours flash in the  
display. Press  
Press and hold CLK again until the minutes flash. Press  
AUDIO to adjust the minutes.  
AUDIO  
to adjust the hours.  
To set the display mode: Press repeatedly to toggle between Clock  
mode and frequency mode.  
19  
PAGE: 19 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 20 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
3. AUDIO: Press AUDIO  
repeatedly to toggle through the  
following modes and  
art=rancf830_a  
use  
/
to make adjustments in those modes.  
AUDIO to decrease/increase the bass setting.  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
Bass: Press  
Treble: Press  
to decrease/increase the treble setting.  
to adjust the audio between the left and  
Balance: Press  
right speakers.  
Hours: Press  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
to decrease/increase the hours.  
to decrease/increase the minutes.  
Minute: Press  
4. Tune: Press to manually go down/up (  
/
) the radio frequency  
and in audio mode to select various settings.  
5. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press  
art=221cf840_a  
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To tune a preset  
station, press the desired memory preset.  
6. SEEK: Press  
SEEK  
to  
art=221cf837_a  
art=221cf841_a  
access the previous or next  
radio station. If pressed for less  
than .5 seconds, the system will seek to the next or previous station.  
7. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn  
the system ON/OFF. Turn to  
adjust the volume levels.  
If the volume is set above a  
certain level, and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back to a “nominal” listening level when the ignition is turned back  
on.  
20  
PAGE: 20 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 21 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
CIMS #1296341  
com_scdpio.mbs04  
itdseq=23  
AM/FM stereo single CD system  
art=rancf806_c  
1. CD eject: Press to eject the  
CD.  
art=rancf827_b  
art=rancf833_a  
2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until  
SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINUTE is displayed. Press  
MENU  
to adjust the  
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is  
off.  
3. MUTE: Press to mute the  
playing media. Press again to  
return to the playing media.  
art=rancf834_a  
art=rancf838_a  
4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly  
to toggle through the following  
modes and use  
/
to make  
adjustment in those modes.  
21  
PAGE: 21 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 22 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
Autoset: Press  
MENU  
to  
art=rancf835_a  
set the strongest local radio stations  
for AM/FM1/FM2 without losing  
your original manually set preset  
stations.  
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1  
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system  
will store the last one in the remaining presets.  
Bass: Press  
MENU  
MENU  
MENU  
to decrease/increase the bass setting.  
to decrease/increase the treble setting.  
to adjust the audio between the left and  
Treble: Press  
Balance: Press  
right speakers.  
Fade: Press  
MENU  
to adjust the audio between the front and  
rear speakers.  
5. TUNE: Press to manually go  
down/up ( ) the radio  
art=rancf835_a  
art=rancf845_a  
/
frequency and also to select  
various settings in menu mode.  
6. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to  
play the tracks on the current  
CD in random order.  
7. REPEAT: Press to repeat the  
current CD track.  
art=221cf806_a  
art=221cf805_a  
art=rancf828_b  
8. FF (Fast forward): Press to  
manually advance in a CD track.  
9. REW (Rewind): Press to  
REW  
1
manually reverse in a CD track.  
10. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press  
art=rancf839_a  
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To recall a previously  
set station, press the desired memory preset button briefly.  
11. SEEK/TRACK: Press to access the next/previous strong station. In  
CD mode, press to advance to the next/previous track.  
22  
PAGE: 22 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 23 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
12. SCAN: Press to toggle between  
SCAN ON and SCAN OFF. When  
art=221cf812_a  
activated, the system scans up  
through and plays a brief sampling of available radio stations or CD  
tracks. Press again to stop.  
13. AM/FM:Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.  
art=rancf842_a  
art=221cf819_a  
14. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF. Turn to  
increase/decrease volume.  
If the volume is set above a  
certain level and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is  
turned back on.  
15. CD: Press to enter CD mode. If  
a CD is already present in the  
system, the disc will begin to  
play.  
art=rancf837_a  
art=221cf823_a  
16. CD slot: Insert a CD label side  
up.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12  
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
dealer for further information.  
23  
PAGE: 23 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 24 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
CIMS #1569891  
com_mbsscd.pio  
itdseq=24  
AM/FM stereo single CD/MP3 Satellite Compatible system  
(if equipped)  
art=rancf861_a  
1. CD eject: Press to eject the  
CD/MP3.  
art=rancf827_b  
art=rancf833_a  
2. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until  
SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINS is displayed. Press  
MENU  
to adjust the  
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is  
off.  
3. MUTE: Press to mute the  
playing media. Press again to  
return to the playing media.  
art=rancf834_a  
art=rancf838_a  
4. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly  
to scroll through the following  
24  
PAGE: 24 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 25 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
modes and use  
/
to make an adjustment in those modes.  
CATEGORY (Satellite Radio if  
equipped): Press MENU until the  
currently active category appears in  
the display (CATEGORY ALL). In  
art=rancf835_a  
CATEGORY ALL, press  
/
to scroll through the list of available  
SEEK or SCAN  
Sirius Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press  
to select the channels within each category. After a category is selected,  
press SEEK to search for that specific channel. To select a different  
category, press MENU until CATEGORY ALL appears in the display.  
Press  
/
to select a different category.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
Autoset: Press  
MENU  
to set the strongest local radio stations  
for AM/FM1/FM2 without losing your original manually set preset  
stations.  
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1  
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system  
will store the last one in the remaining presets.  
Bass: Press  
MENU  
MENU  
MENU  
to decrease/increase the bass setting.  
to decrease/increase the treble setting.  
to adjust the audio between the left and  
Treble: Press  
Balance: Press  
right speakers.  
Fade: Press  
MENU  
to adjust the audio between the front and  
rear speakers.  
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU  
MENU  
to  
go to the previous/next directory.  
Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU to access this  
feature. Use MENU to select flat file mode or directory mode.  
Track # / Normal music name/File name: Press MENU to access and  
use to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music  
name or file name).  
/
25  
PAGE: 25 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 26 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
5. TUNE: Press to manually go  
art=rancf835_a  
down/up (  
/
) the radio  
frequency and also to select  
various settings in menu mode.  
In CATEGORY ALL, press  
/
to scroll through the list of available  
SIRIUS channel Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to Category  
Mode under Menu for further information.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
6. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to  
play the current CD/MP3 tracks  
in random order. In MP3  
art=rancf845_a  
art=221cf806_a  
directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current directory  
in random order.  
7. REPEAT: Press to repeat the  
current CD/MP3 track. The  
selection will repeat  
continuously until deactivated. Press REPEAT again to deactivate.  
8. FF (Fast forward): Press to  
manually advance in a CD/MP3  
track.  
art=221cf805_a  
art=rancf828_b  
art=rancf839_a  
9. REW (Rewind): Press to  
REW  
1
manually reverse in a CD/MP3  
track.  
10. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press  
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To recall a previously  
set station, press the desired memory preset button briefly. You can  
save up to 18 stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.  
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets, six  
each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your  
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a  
preset control until sound returns.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
26  
PAGE: 26 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 27 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
11. SEEK/TRACK: Press to access  
art=rancf874_a  
the previous/next (  
/
)
strong station. In CD/MP3 mode,  
press to advance to the  
previous/next (  
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press  
previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock,  
News, etc.), press SEEK to seek to the previous/next channel in  
SEEK to fast seek through  
/
) track.  
SEEK  
to seek to the  
the selected category. Press and hold  
the previous /next channels.  
In TEXT MODE, press  
display text.  
In CATEGORY ALL, press  
SEEK  
to view the previous/additional  
to select a category.  
TUNE  
SEEK  
In CATEGORY MODE, press  
that category.  
to select a channel within  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
12. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and CD  
mode, press for a brief sampling  
of radio stations or CD tracks.  
Press again to stop.  
art=rancf862_a  
In MP3 flat file mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of MP3  
tracks.  
In MP3 directory mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of all  
tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.  
In MP3 music name/file name mode, press and release to view the next  
12 characters in the MP3 music name/file name of the current MP3 track  
and directory.  
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press and release to view the  
Satellite text message.  
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief  
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
27  
PAGE: 27 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 28 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
13. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.  
art=rancf858_a  
art=rancf857_a  
14. AUX: Press to access AUX  
modes. To return to radio mode,  
press AM/FM.  
If equipped with Satellite Radio, press AUX to cycle through  
SAT1, SAT2 SAT3 (Satellite Radio mode, if available) and  
LINE IN (Auxiliary audio mode, if equipped).  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
15. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF. Turn to  
art=221cf819_a  
increase/decrease volume.  
If the volume is set above a  
certain level and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is  
turned back on.  
16. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3  
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already  
present in the system, the disc  
will begin to play.  
art=rancf837_a  
art=221cf823_a  
17. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3 label  
side up.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12  
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
authorized dealer for further information.  
28  
PAGE: 28 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 29 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
CIMS #1273156  
com_premcd.mbs  
itdseq=25  
Premium in-dash CD6/MP3 disc audio system  
art=rancf804_c  
1. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.  
art=rancf825_a  
art=rancf837_a  
2. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3  
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already in  
the system, the disc will start  
playing.  
3. EJ (CD eject): To eject an  
individual CD/MP3, press the  
art=rancf827_b  
art=rancf833_a  
eject control and select the  
correct slot number by pressing the corresponding memory preset.  
Press and hold to eject all loaded CDs.  
4. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until  
SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINUTE is displayed. Press  
MENU  
to adjust the  
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is  
off.  
29  
PAGE: 29 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 30 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
5. MUTE: Press to mute the  
playing media. Press again to  
return to the playing media.  
art=rancf834_a  
art=rancf838_a  
6. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly  
to toggle through the following  
modes and use  
/
to make  
adjustment in those modes.  
Autoset: Allows you to set the  
strongest local radio stations  
without losing your original  
manually set preset stations for  
art=rancf846_a  
AM/FM1/FM2 . Press MENU to access. Use  
MENU  
to set.  
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1  
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system  
will store the last one in the remaining presets.  
Bass: Press  
MENU  
MENU  
MENU  
to decrease/increase the bass setting.  
to decrease/increase the treble setting.  
to adjust the audio between the left and  
Treble: Press  
Balance: Press  
right speakers.  
Fade: Press  
MENU  
to adjust the audio between the front and  
rear speakers.  
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU  
/
to go to  
the previous/next directory.  
Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU to access this  
feature. Use MENU to select flat file mode or directory mode.  
Track #/normal music name/file name: Press MENU to access and  
use to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music  
/
name or file name).  
7. TUNE/DISC: Press to manually go down/up (  
/
) the radio  
frequency, select the previous/next CD or to select various settings  
in menu mode. In MP3 directory mode, press  
/
to access the  
previous/next directory  
8. TEXT: In MP3 normal music name/file name mode, press to view the  
next 12 characters in the MP3 music name/filename of the current  
MP3 track and directory.  
30  
PAGE: 30 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 31 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
9. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to  
play the tracks on the current  
art=rancf845_a  
art=221cf807_a  
CD/MP3 in random order. In  
MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current  
directory in random order.  
10. COMP (Compression): In  
CD/MP3 modes, press to bring  
loud and soft passages together  
for a more consistent listening level.  
11. REPEAT: Press to repeat the  
current CD/MP3 track.  
art=221cf806_a  
art=221cf805_a  
12. FF (Fast forward): Press to  
manually advance in a CD/MP3  
track.  
13. REW (Rewind): Press to  
REW  
1
manually reverse in a CD/MP3  
art=rancf828_b  
art=rancf840_a  
track.  
14. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press  
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset  
station, press the desired memory preset.  
15. SEEK/TRACK: In radio, CD and MP3 flat file mode, press  
/
to access the next/previous strong station or track. In MP3 directory  
mode, press to select the next/previous track in the current  
directory.  
16. SCAN: In radio, CD and MP3  
flat file mode, press for a brief  
art=221cf812_a  
art=221cf841_a  
sampling of radio stations or  
CD/MP3 tracks. In MP3 directory mode, press to hear a brief  
sampling of all tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.  
17. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF. Turn to  
increase/decrease volume.  
If the volume is set above a  
certain level and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is  
turned back on.  
31  
PAGE: 31 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 32 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
18. LOAD: To load a CD/MP3 disc to a specific slot, press LOAD and  
select the slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press  
and hold LOAD to autoload up to six discs.  
19. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3, label side up.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12  
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
dealer for further information.  
CIMS #1569892  
com_mbscdx6.pio  
itdseq=26  
Premium and Audiophile In-dash CD6/MP3 disc Satellite  
Compatible audio systems (if equipped)  
art=rancf863_a  
32  
PAGE: 32 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 33 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
1. AM/FM: Press to select  
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency bands.  
art=rancf869_a  
art=rancf867_a  
2. CD: Press to enter CD/MP3  
mode. If a CD/MP3 is already in  
the system, the disc will start  
playing.  
3. AUX: Press to access AUX  
modes. To return to radio mode,  
art=rancf868_a  
press AM/FM.  
If equipped with Satellite  
Radio, press AUX to cycle through SAT1, SAT2 SAT3  
(Satellite Radio mode, if available) and LINE IN (Auxiliary  
audio mode, if equipped).  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
4. EJ (CD eject): To eject an  
individual CD/MP3, press the  
art=rancf827_b  
art=rancf833_a  
eject control and select the  
correct slot number by pressing the corresponding memory preset.  
Press and hold to eject all loaded CDs.  
5. CLK (Clock): Press CLK until  
SELECT HOUR or SELECT  
MINS is displayed. Press  
MENU  
to adjust the  
hours/minutes. Press CLK to display the time when the ignition is  
off.  
6. MUTE: Press to mute the  
playing media. Press again to  
return to the playing media.  
art=rancf834_a  
art=rancf838_a  
7. MENU: Press MENU repeatedly  
to toggle through the following  
modes and use  
/
to make  
adjustment in those modes.  
CATEGORY (Satellite Radio if  
equipped): Press MENU until the  
currently active category appears in  
the display (CATEGORY ALL). In  
art=rancf846_a  
33  
PAGE: 33 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 34 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
CATEGORY ALL, press  
Sirius Categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.) Press  
/
to scroll through the list of available  
SEEK or SCAN  
to select the channels within each category. After a category is selected,  
press SEEK to search for that specific channel. To select a different  
category, press MENU until CATEGORY ALL appears in the display.  
Press  
/
to select a different category.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
Autoset: Allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without  
losing your original manually set preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press  
MENU to access. Use  
MENU  
to set.  
When the six strongest stations are filled, the station stored in preset 1  
will begin playing. If there are less than six strong stations, the system  
will store the last one in the remaining presets.  
Bass: Press  
MENU  
MENU  
MENU  
to decrease/increase the bass setting.  
to decrease/increase the treble setting.  
to adjust the audio between the left and  
Treble: Press  
Balance: Press  
right speakers.  
Fade: Press  
MENU  
to adjust the audio between the front and  
rear speakers.  
Next/previous directory: In MP3 mode, press MENU  
/
to go to  
the previous/next directory.  
Flat file/directory mode: In MP3 mode, press MENU to access this  
feature. Use MENU to select flat file mode or directory mode.  
Track #/ normal music name/file name: Press MENU to access and  
use to scroll through MP3 display options (track #, normal music  
/
name or file name).  
8. TUNE/DISC: In radio mode,  
press to manually go down/up  
art=rancf870_a  
(
/
) the radio frequency,  
or to access another CD/MP3.  
Also use in menu mode to select various settings.  
In CATEGORY ALL, press  
/
to scroll through the list of available  
SIRIUS channel categories (Pop, Rock, News, etc.). Refer to Category  
Mode under Menu for further information.  
34  
PAGE: 34 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 35 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
9. SHUFF (Shuffle): Press to  
play the tracks on the current  
art=221cf808_a  
CD/MP3 in random order. In  
MP3 directory mode, press to play the tracks within the current  
directory in random order.  
10. COMP (Compression): In  
CD/MP3 modes, press to bring  
loud and soft passages together  
for a more consistent listening level.  
art=221cf807_a  
art=221cf806_a  
11. REPEAT: Press to repeat the  
current CD/MP3 track. The  
selection will repeat  
continuously until deactivated. Press REPEAT again to deactivate.  
12. FF (Fast forward): Press to  
manually advance in a CD/MP3  
track.  
art=221cf805_a  
art=rancf828_b  
art=rancf877_a  
13. REW (Rewind): Press to  
REW  
1
manually reverse in a CD/MP3  
track.  
14. Memory presets: To set a  
station: Select frequency band  
AM/FM; tune to a station, press  
REW  
1
FF  
2
REPEAT  
3
COMP  
4
SHUFF  
5
6
and hold a preset button until sound returns. To select a preset  
station, press the desired memory preset. You can save up to 18  
stations, six in AM, six in FM1 and FM2.  
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), there are 18 available presets, six  
each for SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3. To save satellite channels in your  
memory presets, tune to the desired channel then press and hold a  
preset control until sound returns.  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
15. SEEK/TRACK: In radio, CD  
and MP3 flat file mode,  
art=rancf874_a  
press  
/
to access the  
previous/next strong station or  
track. In MP3 directory mode, press to select the next/previous track  
in the current directory.  
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press  
SEEK  
to seek to the  
previous/next channel. If a specific category is selected, (Jazz, Rock,  
35  
PAGE: 35 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 36 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
News, etc.), press  
the selected category. Press and hold  
the previous /next channels.  
SEEK  
to seek to the previous/next channel in  
SEEK to fast seek through  
In TEXT MODE, press  
display text.  
In CATEGORY ALL, press  
SEEK  
to view the previous/additional  
to select a category.  
TUNE  
SEEK  
In CATEGORY MODE, press  
that category.  
to select a channel within  
Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS subscription.  
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.  
16. TEXT/SCAN: In radio and CD  
mode, press for a brief sampling  
of radio stations or CD tracks.  
Press again to stop.  
art=rancf862_a  
In MP3 flat file mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of MP3  
tracks.  
In MP3 directory mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling of all  
tracks in the current directory. Press again to stop.  
In MP3 music name/file name mode, press and release to view the next  
12 characters in the MP3 music name/file name of the current MP3 track  
and directory.  
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press and release to view the  
Satellite text message.  
In Satellite Radio mode (if equipped), press and hold to hear a brief  
sampling of the next channels. Press again to stop.  
17. ON/OFF/Volume: Press to turn  
ON/OFF. Turn to  
art=221cf841_a  
increase/decrease volume.  
If the volume is set above a  
certain level and the ignition is  
turned off, the volume will come  
back on at a “nominal” listening level when the ignition switch is  
turned back on.  
18. LOAD: Press to load a CD/MP3.  
To load a CD/MP3 disc to a  
art=rancf875_a  
specific slot, press LOAD and  
select the slot number by pressing the memory preset buttons. Press  
and hold LOAD to autoload up to six discs.  
36  
PAGE: 36 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 37 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
19. CD slot: Insert a CD/MP3, label  
side up.  
art=221cf823_a  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12  
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
authorized dealer for further information.  
CIMS #1538510  
com_aux-inputjack.ran  
itdseq=27  
Auxiliary input jack (if equipped)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with  
an Auxiliary Input Jack (AIJ). The  
Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way  
to connect your portable music  
art=ranad857_c  
player to the in-vehicle audio  
system. This allows the audio from a  
portable music player to be played  
through the vehicle speakers with  
high fidelity. To achieve optimal  
performance, please observe the  
following instructions when  
attaching your portable music device to the audio system.  
Required equipment:  
1. Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones  
2. An audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8 in. (3.5 mm)  
connectors at each end  
To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack:  
1. Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off.  
2. Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully  
charged and that the device is turned off.  
3. Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone  
output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable  
to the AIJ in your vehicle.  
37  
PAGE: 37 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 38 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
4. Turn the radio on, using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded  
into the system. Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level.  
5. Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1/2 the  
volume.  
6. Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE IN appears in  
the display.  
You should hear audio from your portable music player although it  
may be low.  
7. Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the  
level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between  
the AUX and FM or CD controls.  
Troubleshooting:  
1. Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output. Line level  
outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not  
compatible with the AIJ. The AIJ will only work correctly with  
devices that have a headphone output with a volume control.  
2. Do not set the portable music player’s volume level higher than is  
necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio  
system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality.  
Many portable music players have different output levels, so not all  
players should be set at the same levels. Some players will sound  
best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume.  
3. If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels, turn the  
portable music player volume down. If the problems persists, replace  
or recharge the batteries in the portable music player.  
4. The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner  
when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control  
(play, pause, etc.) over the attached portable music player.  
5. For safety reasons, connecting or adjusting the settings on your  
portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is  
moving. Also, the portable music player should be stored in a secure  
location, such as the center console or the glove box, when the  
vehicle is in motion. The audio extension cable must be long enough  
to allow the portable music player to be safely stored while the  
vehicle is in motion.  
CIMS #1509322  
com_cdcares-info.06  
itdseq=28  
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION  
Radio frequencies:  
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications  
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications  
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:  
38  
PAGE: 38 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 39 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz  
FM: 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz  
Radio reception factors:  
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:  
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the  
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.  
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,  
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.  
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal  
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency  
is displayed.  
CD/CD player care  
Do:  
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.  
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner  
and wipe from the center out.  
Don’t:  
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods  
of time.  
• Clean using a circular motion.  
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12  
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,  
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not  
function correctly when used in Mazda CD players. Irregular  
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs  
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted  
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to  
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be  
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive  
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your  
authorized dealer for further information.  
Audio system warranty and service  
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If  
service is necessary, see your authorized Mazda dealership.  
CIMS #1491146  
com_cares-sr.06  
Satellite radio information (if equipped)  
itdseq=29  
Satellite radio channels: SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music, news,  
sports, weather, traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels. For  
39  
PAGE: 39 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 40 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels,  
visit www.sirius.com in the United States, www.sirius-canada.ca in  
Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.  
Satellite radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your  
vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the  
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an  
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio  
system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite  
radio reception performance:  
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the  
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other  
material as far away from the antenna as possible.  
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway  
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can  
interfere with your reception.  
• Station overload: When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating  
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an  
audio mute.  
Unlike AM/FM audible static, you will hear an audio mute when there is  
a satellite radio signal interference. Your radio display may display NO  
SIGNAL to indicate the interference.  
SIRIUS satellite radio service: SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription  
based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and  
entertainment programming. A service fee is required in order to receive  
SIRIUS service. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed  
SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include:  
• Hardware and limited subscription term, which begins on the date of  
sale or lease of the vehicle.  
• Online media player providing access to all 65 SIRIUS music channels  
over the internet (U.S. customers only).  
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474.  
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add  
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular  
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you.  
Mazda Motor Corporation shall not be responsible for any such  
programming changes.  
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN): This 12–digit  
Satellite Serial Number is needed to activate, modify or track your  
40  
PAGE: 40 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 41 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
satellite radio account. You will need this number when communicating  
with SIRIUS. While in Satellite Radio mode, you can view this number on  
the radio display by pressing AUX and Preset 1 control simultaneously.  
Radio Display  
ACQUIRING  
Condition  
Radio requires more  
than two seconds to  
produce audio for the  
selected channel.  
Internal module or  
system failure  
Action Required  
No action required.  
This message should  
disappear shortly.  
SAT FAULT  
If this message does  
not clear within a short  
period of time, or with  
an ignition key cycle,  
your receiver may have  
a fault. See your  
present.  
authorized dealer for  
service.  
INVALID CHNL  
Channel no longer  
available.  
This previously  
available channel is no  
longer available. Tune  
to another channel. If  
the channel was one of  
your presets, you may  
choose another channel  
for that preset button.  
Contact SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474 to  
subscribe to the  
UNSUBSCRIBED  
NO TEXT  
Subscription not  
available for this  
channel.  
channel or tune to  
another channel.  
Artist information not Artist information not  
available.  
available at this time on  
this channel. The  
system is working  
properly.  
41  
PAGE: 41 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 42 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Entertainment Systems  
Radio Display  
NO TEXT  
Condition  
Action Required  
Song title information Song title information  
not available.  
not available at this  
time on this channel.  
The system is working  
properly.  
NO TEXT  
Category information  
not available.  
Category information  
not available at this  
time on this channel.  
The system is working  
properly.  
NO SIGNAL  
Loss of signal from  
the SIRIUS satellite or  
SIRIUS tower to the  
vehicle antenna.  
You are in a location  
that is blocking the  
SIRIUS signal (i.e.,  
tunnel, under an  
overpass, dense foliage,  
etc). The system is  
working properly. When  
you move into an open  
area, the signal should  
return.  
UPDATING  
Update of channel  
programming in  
progress.  
No action required. The  
process may take up to  
three minutes.  
CALL SIRIUS  
1–888–539–7474  
Satellite service has  
been deactivated by  
SIRIUS Satellite  
Radio.  
Call SIRIUS at  
1–888–539–7474 to  
re-activate or resolve  
subscription issues.  
42  
PAGE: 42 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 43 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Climate Controls  
CIMS #1064356  
com_heatran.fly  
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM  
(IF EQUIPPED)  
itdseq=30  
art=rancf780_a  
1. Fan speed adjustment:  
Controls the volume of air  
circulated in the vehicle.  
2. Temperature selection:  
Controls the temperature of the  
airflow in the vehicle.  
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the  
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.  
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and  
floor vents.  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents.  
CIMS #1052492  
com_htonlytips.fly  
itdseq=31  
Operating tips  
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place  
the air flow selector in the  
position.  
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm  
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.  
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air  
flow to the rear seats.  
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
43  
PAGE: 43 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 44 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Climate Controls  
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel  
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden  
stop.  
CIMS #1284326  
com_man-ac-mbs.fly  
itdseq=32  
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM  
(IF EQUIPPED)  
art=rancf781_a  
1. Fan speed adjustment:  
Controls the volume of air  
circulated in the vehicle.  
2. Temperature selection:  
Controls the temperature of the  
airflow in the vehicle.  
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the  
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.  
MAX A/C (if equipped): A/C compressor is ON. Recirculated air flows  
from the instrument panel vents only. Temperature of air is not  
adjustable (cold only).  
A/C (if equipped): A/C compressor is ON. Outside air flows from the  
instrument panel vents only.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents only.  
(A/C compressor is off).  
OFF: Outside air is shut off and the fan motor does not operate.  
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the  
floor vents. (A/C compressor is ON).  
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents. (A/C compressor is  
off).  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and  
the floor vents. (A/C compressor is ON).  
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents only.  
(A/C compressor is ON).  
CIMS #1284327  
com_op-tipfly.mbs  
itdseq=33  
Operating tips  
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place  
the air flow selector in the  
position.  
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle: do not drive with the  
air flow selector in the OFF position.  
44  
PAGE: 44 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 45 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Climate Controls  
• Under normal weather conditions, do not leave the air flow selector in  
MAX A/C or OFF when the vehicle is parked. This allows the vehicle  
to “breathe” using the outside air inlet vents.  
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the  
airflow to the back seats.  
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of  
the windshield.  
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:  
1. Select  
.
2. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.  
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.  
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.  
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents  
located in the middle of the instrument panel.  
WARNING: Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel  
as these objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden  
stop.  
45  
PAGE: 45 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 46 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
CIMS #222826  
com_headlamp_title  
itdseq=34  
HEADLAMP CONTROL  
CIMS #1034721  
com_headlamp_control.04  
itdseq=35  
art=mltcf403_a  
Turns the lamps off.  
Turns on the parking lamps,  
instrument panel lamps, license  
plate lamps and tail lamps.  
Turns the headlamps on.  
CIMS #83532 com_fog-title.ie  
itdseq=36  
Foglamp control (if equipped)  
CIMS #1538461  
com_foglamps.ran-07  
itdseq=37  
The foglamps can be turned on  
when the headlamp control is in  
art=rancf334_a  
the  
or  
position and the  
high beams are not turned on.  
Pull headlamp control towards you  
to turn foglamps on. The foglamp  
indicator light  
on the headlamp  
control and in the instrument  
cluster will illuminate.  
CIMS #1124037  
com_brights.mazda  
itdseq=38  
High beams  
After turning the headlamps on,  
push the lever toward the  
art=rancf322_a  
instrument panel to activate. Pull  
the lever towards you to deactivate.  
46  
PAGE: 46 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 47 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
CIMS #54762  
com_flash_to_pass  
itdseq=39  
Flash to pass  
Pull toward you slightly to activate  
and release to deactivate.  
art=rancf323_a  
CIMS #222828  
com_drl_title_ie  
CIMS #1124036  
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)  
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.  
To activate:  
itdseq=40  
com_daytime_lamps.mazda  
itdseq=41  
• the ignition must be in the ON position and  
• the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp.  
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at  
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp  
(DRL) (if equipped) system does not activate the parking lights  
or side marker lights and generally may not provide adequate  
lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your  
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.  
CIMS #222830  
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL  
com_panel_dimmer_title  
itdseq=42  
CIMS #1048941  
com_panel_dimmer2.ran  
itdseq=43  
Use to adjust the brightness of the  
instrument panel and all applicable  
switches in the vehicle during  
art=muscf400_b  
headlamp and parklamp operation.  
Move the control up or down to  
adjust the intensity of the panel  
lighting.  
Move the control to the full upright  
position, past detent, to turn on the  
interior lamps.  
AIMING THE HEADLAMPS  
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed before leaving the  
assembly plant. If your vehicle is involved in an accident or if you have  
CIMS #975083  
com_aim-lites.info.fly  
itdseq=44  
47  
PAGE: 47 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 48 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
problems fixing the alignment of your headlamps, have them checked by  
a qualified service technician.  
CIMS #1437296  
com_vert_aim.mbs  
itdseq=45  
Headlamp aim adjustment  
The headlamps are designed to be mechanically aimed, but can also be  
aimed visually by doing the following:  
1. Park your vehicle on a level surface about 25 feet (7.6 meters) away  
from a vertical plain surface (3). Check your headlamp alignment at  
night or in a dark area so that you can see the headlamp beam  
pattern.  
• (1) 8 feet (2.4 meters)  
art=ranmc313_a  
• (2) Center height of lamp to  
ground  
• (3) 25 feet (7.6 meters)  
• (4) Horizontal reference line  
• (5) Center of headlamps  
• (6) Center line of the vehicle  
2. The center of the headlamp is  
marked either on the lens (a  
circle or cross marker) or on the bulb shield, internal to the lamp  
(mark or feature). Measure the height from the center of your  
headlamp to the ground (2) and mark an 8 foot (2.4 meter) long  
horizontal line on the wall or screen (1) at this height (masking tape  
works well).  
3. Turn on the low beam  
headlamps and open the hood.  
art=ranmc314_a  
4. Locate the high intensity area of  
the beam pattern and place the  
top edge of the intensity zone  
even with the horizontal  
reference line (4). If the top  
edge of the high intensity area  
is not even with the horizontal  
line, follow the next step to  
adjust it.  
48  
PAGE: 48 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 49 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
5. Locate the vertical adjuster for  
each headlamp. Adjust the aim  
by using a 4 mm wrench to turn  
the adjuster control either  
art=mbscf406_a  
clockwise (to adjust down) or  
counterclockwise (to adjust up).  
6. In addition to the horizontal line  
marked in step 2, a pair of  
vertical lines (5) must be  
marked at the center line of the  
headlamps on the wall or  
screen.  
7. On the wall or screen, locate the high intensity area of the beam  
pattern. The left edge of the high intensity area should be even with  
the vertical line corresponding to the headlamp under adjustment. If  
the left edge of the high intensity area is not even with the vertical  
line, follow the next step to adjust it.  
8. Locate the horizontal adjuster  
for each headlamp. Use a 4 mm  
wrench, turning it clockwise or  
counterclockwise, to place the  
left edge of the high intensity  
area even with the vertical line  
corresponding to the headlamp  
under adjustment.  
art=mbscf407_a  
CIMS #54764  
com_turn_indicator  
itdseq=46  
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL  
• Push down to activate the left  
turn signal.  
art=rancf324_a  
• Push up to activate the right turn  
signal.  
49  
PAGE: 49 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 50 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
CIMS #54745 com_interior.02  
itdseq=47  
INTERIOR LAMPS  
CIMS #628962  
Courtesy/reading lamps (if equipped)  
The courtesy lamp lights when:  
• any door is opened.  
com_courtesy_lamps.ran  
itdseq=48  
art=rancf308_b  
• the instrument panel dimmer  
switch is held up until the  
courtesy lamps come on.  
• the remote entry controls are  
pressed and the ignition is OFF.  
CIMS #80513  
com_ext_bulbs.02  
itdseq=49  
BULB REPLACEMENT  
CIMS #1462914  
com_condensation  
itdseq=50  
Headlamp Condensation  
The headlamps are vented to equalize pressure. When moist air enters  
the headlamp(s) through the vents, there is a possibility that  
condensation can occur. This condensation is normal and will clear  
within 45 minutes of headlamp operation.  
CIMS #684809  
com_bulb_chart.mbs  
itdseq=51  
Using the right bulbs  
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs  
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an  
“E” for Europe to ensure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern  
and safe visibility.  
NOTE: The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the  
lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.  
Function  
Park/turn/side marker  
lamps (front)  
Headlamps  
Fog lamps (if  
Number of bulbs  
Trade number  
3157 A (amber)  
9007  
2
2
2
9006  
equipped)  
Hi-mount brake lamp  
Rear stop/tail lamps  
Rear turn lamps  
1
2
2
922  
4157K or 3157K  
3156  
50  
PAGE: 50 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 51 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
Function  
Number of bulbs  
Trade number  
Rear license plate  
lamps  
2
194  
Backup lamps  
Dome lamp  
Map/dome-SuperCab  
(if equipped)  
Map/dome-Regular  
Cab (if equipped)  
2
1
2
3155  
912  
904  
904  
1
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.  
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer.  
CIMS #600057  
com_interior_bulbs.j14  
itdseq=52  
Replacing the interior bulbs  
Check the operation of the following interior bulbs frequently:  
• interior overhead lamp  
• map lamp  
For bulb replacement, see an authorized Mazda dealer.  
CIMS #600056  
com_check-bulbs.j14  
itdseq=53  
Replacing exterior bulbs  
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.  
CIMS #684808  
com_headlamps.mbs  
itdseq=54  
Replacing headlamp bulbs  
NOTE: The procedure can be difficult. Your Mazda dealer has the proper  
tools, training and parts to perform this task. If you have difficulty with  
this, visit your local Mazda dealer.  
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb  
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If  
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be  
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is  
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to  
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of  
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection  
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.  
51  
PAGE: 51 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 52 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
WARNING: Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen  
bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping  
a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep  
halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.  
To remove the headlamp bulb:  
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in OFF position, then open the hood.  
2. Reach behind the lamp assembly for access and disconnect the  
electrical connector.  
3. Locate the bulb retaining ring  
behind the headlamp assembly.  
art=mbscf404_a  
4. Remove the bulb retaining ring  
by turning it counterclockwise  
and remove the old bulb by  
gently pulling it straight back  
out of the lamp assembly. Keep  
the retaining ring to retain the  
new bulb.  
art=mbscf400_a  
To install the new bulb:  
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of  
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do  
not touch the glass. The oil from your hands could cause the bulb  
to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Always wear  
safety glasses while handling bulbs.  
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with  
rubbing alcohol before being used.  
1. With the flat side of the bulb’s plastic base facing upward, insert the  
glass end of the bulb into the lamp assembly. You may need to turn  
the bulb left or right to align the grooves in the plastic base with the  
52  
PAGE: 52 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 53 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
tabs in the lamp assembly. When the grooves are aligned, push the  
bulb into the lamp assembly until the plastic base contacts the rear  
of the lamp assembly.  
2. Install the bulb retaining ring over the plastic base until it contacts  
the rear of the socket by rotating clockwise until you feel a “stop.”  
3. Install the electrical connector into the plastic base until it snaps,  
locking it into position.  
4. Turn the headlamps on and make sure they work properly. If the  
headlamp was correctly aligned before you changed the bulb, you  
should not need to align it again.  
Replacing front park/turn side marker bulbs  
1. Make sure headlamp switch is in  
OFF position, then open the  
hood.  
art=mbscf405_a  
2. Remove the screw from lamp  
assembly.  
3. Disengage lamp assembly by  
pulling it straight forward. It has  
a snap fit.  
4. Rotate bulb socket  
counterclockwise and remove  
from lamp assembly.  
art=mbscf408_a  
53  
PAGE: 53 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 54 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
5. Carefully pull bulb straight out  
of socket and push in the new  
bulb.  
art=dnomc306_a  
6. Install the bulb socket in lamp  
assembly by turning clockwise.  
7. Align the lamp on the vehicle  
and push to snap in place.  
8. Install the screw on lamp assembly.  
Replacing stop lamp/tail lamp/sidemarker lamp/turn lamp/backup  
lamp bulbs  
These bulbs are located in the same  
portion of the tail lamp assembly,  
one just below the other. Follow the  
same steps to replace either bulb:  
art=mbscf401_a  
1. Open the tailgate to expose the  
lamp assemblies.  
2. Remove the four screws and the  
lamp assembly from vehicle.  
3. Rotate the bulb socket  
counterclockwise and remove  
from lamp assembly.  
art=mbscf409_a  
4. Carefully pull the bulb straight  
out of the socket and push in  
the new bulb.  
5. Install the bulb socket in lamp  
assembly by turning clockwise.  
6. Install the lamp assembly and  
secure with four screws.  
54  
PAGE: 54 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 55 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
Replacing fog lamp bulbs  
WARNING: Handling Halogen Bulbs: When a halogen bulb  
breaks, it is dangerous. These bulbs contain pressurized gas. If  
one is broken, it will explode and serious injuries could be  
caused by the flying glass. If the glass portion of the bulb is  
touched with bare hands, body oil could cause the bulb to  
overheat and explode when lit. Never touch the glass portion of  
the bulb with your bare hands and always wear eye protection  
when handling or working around halogen bulbs.  
WARNING: Children and Halogen Bulbs: Playing with a halogen  
bulb is dangerous. Serious injuries could be caused by dropping  
a halogen bulb or breaking in some other way. Always keep  
halogen bulbs out of the reach of children.  
NOTE: If the bulb is accidentally touched, it should be cleaned with  
rubbing alcohol before being used.  
1. Remove the bulb socket from  
the fog lamp by turning  
counterclockwise.  
art=ranmc306_a  
2. Disconnect the electrical  
connector from the fog lamp  
bulb.  
3. Connect the electrical connector to the new fog lamp bulb.  
4. Install the bulb socket in the fog lamp turning clockwise.  
Replacing high-mount brake lamp  
To remove the brake lamp assembly:  
art=ranmc312_a  
1. Remove the two screws and  
lamp assembly from vehicle.  
2. Remove the bulb socket from  
lamp assembly by rotating it counterclockwise.  
3. Carefully pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.  
To install the brake lamp assembly:  
1. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly by rotating clockwise.  
2. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws.  
55  
PAGE: 55 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 56 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Lights  
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs  
The license plate bulbs are located  
behind the rear bumper. To change  
the license plate lamp bulbs:  
art=exdmc038_b  
1. Reach behind the rear bumper  
to locate the bulb socket.  
2. Twist the socket  
counterclockwise and remove.  
3. Pull out the old bulb from  
socket and push in the new  
bulb.  
4. Install the bulb socket in lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.  
56  
PAGE: 56 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 57 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
CIMS #992737  
com_multi-lever.ran  
itdseq=55  
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER  
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end  
of the control away from you to  
increase the speed of the wipers  
(from desired interval to low or high  
speed position); rotate towards you  
to decrease the speed of the wipers.  
art=rancf325_a  
Windshield washer: Push the end  
of the stalk:  
art=rancf326_a  
• briefly: causes a single swipe of  
the wipers without washer fluid.  
• a quick push and hold: the wipers  
will swipe three times with  
washer fluid.  
• a long push and hold: the wipers  
and washer fluid will be activated  
for up to ten seconds.  
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.  
This may cause the washer pump to overheat. Check the washer fluid  
level frequently. Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.  
This may scratch the glass, damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper  
motor to burn out. Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield,  
always use the windshield washer. In freezing weather, be sure the wiper  
blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers.  
57  
PAGE: 57 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 58 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
CIMS #1445671  
com_tilt-steering-mbs  
itdseq=56  
TILT STEERING WHEEL (IF EQUIPPED)  
To adjust the steering wheel:  
art=207cf323_a  
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel  
release control toward you.  
2. Move the steering wheel up or  
down until you find the desired  
location.  
3. Release the steering wheel  
release control. This will lock  
the steering wheel in position.  
WARNING: Adjusting the steering wheel while the vehicle is  
moving is dangerous. Moving it can very easily cause the driver  
to abruptly turn to the left or right. This can lead to loss of  
control or an accident. Never adjust the steering wheel while  
the vehicle is moving.  
CIMS #101591 com_center.ie  
itdseq=57  
CENTER CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
CIMS #101830 com_center.09  
itdseq=58  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a  
variety of console features. These  
include:  
art=rancf520_b  
• Utility compartment with  
cassette/compact disc storage  
• Cupholders  
• Flip up armrest  
WARNING: Use only soft cups  
in the cupholder. Hard objects  
can injure you in a collision.  
CIMS #75589  
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)  
com_powerpoint  
CIMS #81461  
itdseq=59  
com_powerpoint.04  
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert  
any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the  
outlet and blow the fuse. Do not hang any type of accessory or  
accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the power  
outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty.  
itdseq=60  
58  
PAGE: 58 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 59 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
The auxiliary power points are  
located on the instrument panel.  
art=rancf517_e  
Do not use the power point for  
operating the cigarette lighter  
element (if equipped).  
To prevent the fuse from being  
blown, do not use the power  
point(s) over the vehicle capacity of  
12 VDC/180W. Refer to Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel in the  
Roadside Emergencies chapter for fuse ratings in your vehicle.  
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not use the power  
point longer than necessary when the engine is not running.  
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.  
Cigar/Cigarette lighter (if equipped)  
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter  
socket.  
Do not hold the lighter in with your hand while it is heating, this will  
damage the lighter element and socket. The lighter will be released from  
its heating position when it is ready to be used.  
Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not covered by your  
warranty.  
CIMS #993361  
com_pwr-window.f12  
itdseq=61  
POWER WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)  
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and  
do not let children play with the power windows. They may  
seriously injure themselves.  
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify  
they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or  
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.  
Press and hold the bottom part of  
the rocker switch to open the  
window. Press and hold the top part  
of the rocker switch to close the  
window.  
art=rancf518_b  
59  
PAGE: 59 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 60 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
CIMS #959854  
com_auto-dwn-window  
itdseq=62  
One touch down  
Allows the driver’s window to open  
fully without holding the control  
down. Press completely down on  
AUTO and release quickly. Press  
again to stop.  
art=rancf519_b  
CIMS #764576  
EXTERIOR MIRRORS  
com_mirror-title  
itdseq=63  
CIMS #689332  
com_pwrmirr-title.maz.ie  
Power mirror control (if equipped)  
itdseq=64  
CIMS #76084  
To adjust your mirrors:  
com_power-mirrors.arrows  
itdseq=65  
art=207cf015_a  
1. Select  
mirror or  
mirror.  
to adjust the left  
to adjust the right  
2. Move the control in the  
direction you wish to tilt the  
mirror.  
3. Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place.  
CIMS #959877  
com_foldaway.fly  
itdseq=66  
Fold-away mirrors  
Pull the side mirrors in carefully  
when driving through a narrow  
space, like an automatic car wash.  
art=unocf342_a  
CIMS #1122037  
com_speed-cntrl.mbs  
itdseq=67  
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)  
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)  
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed  
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).  
WARNING: Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on  
roads that are winding, slippery, or unpaved. You may lose  
control of the vehicle.  
60  
PAGE: 60 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 61 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
WARNING: Do not shift the gearshift lever into N (Neutral)  
with the speed control on. You may lose control of the vehicle  
or cause engine system damage.  
CIMS #1264224  
com_use-spd-cntrl.mbs04  
itdseq=68  
Setting speed control  
The controls for using your speed  
control are located on the steering  
wheel for your convenience.  
art=rancf328_a  
1. Press the ON control and  
release it.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.  
3. Press the SET + control and  
release it.  
art=rancf331_a  
4. Take your foot off the  
accelerator pedal.  
5. The indicator light  
instrument cluster will turn on.  
Note:  
on the  
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a  
steep hill.  
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you  
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.  
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below  
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.  
• If the vehicle speed decreases to 30 mph (48 km/h) or less, your  
speed control will disengage  
Disengaging speed control  
To disengage the speed control:  
• Depress the brake pedal or  
• Depress the clutch pedal (if equipped).  
Disengaging the speed control will not erase previous set speed.  
Note: When you use the clutch pedal to disengage the speed control,  
the engine speed may briefly increase, this is normal.  
61  
PAGE: 61 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 62 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
Resuming a set speed  
Press the RES (resume) control and  
release it. This will automatically  
return the vehicle to the previously  
set speed. The RES control will not  
work if the vehicle speed is not  
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h).  
art=rancf330_a  
Increasing speed while using speed control  
There are three ways to set a higher  
speed:  
art=rancf331_a  
• Press and hold the SET + control  
until you get to the desired  
speed, then release the control.  
• Press and release the SET +  
control to operate the Tap-Up function. Each tap will increase the set  
speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the  
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET + control.  
Reducing speed while using speed control  
There are three ways to reduce a  
set speed:  
art=rancf332_a  
• Press and hold the CST - control  
until you get to the desired  
speed, then release the control.  
• Press and release the CST -  
control to operate the Tap-Down  
function. Each tap will decrease the set speed by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).  
• Depress the brake pedal or the  
clutch pedal (if equipped) until  
the desired vehicle speed is  
art=rancf331_a  
reached, press the SET + control.  
Turning off speed control  
There are three ways to turn off the speed control:  
62  
PAGE: 62 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 63 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
• Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will  
not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed.  
• Press the speed control OFF  
control.  
art=rancf329_a  
• Turn OFF the ignition.  
Note: When you turn off the speed  
control or the ignition, your speed  
control set speed memory is erased.  
Note: Fully depressing the clutch  
pedal may cause a flare in engine RPM as the throttle is returned to idle.  
This is normal.  
CIMS #197226  
com_overdrive.title-ie  
itdseq=69  
OVERDRIVE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)  
CIMS #111943  
Activating overdrive  
com_overdrive-activate  
itdseq=70  
(Overdrive) is the normal drive position for the best fuel economy.  
The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and downshifts through  
all available gears.  
CIMS #713261  
Deactivating overdrive  
com_overdrive-deativate.mbs  
itdseq=71  
Press the Transmission Control  
Switch (TCS) located on the end of  
art=rangf110_a  
O/D  
ON/OFF  
the gearshift lever. The O/D Off  
indicator light will illuminate on the  
instrument cluster. The transmission  
will operate in all gears except overdrive.  
To return to normal overdrive mode, press the Transmission Control  
Switch again. The O/D Off indicator light will no longer be illuminated.  
When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will  
automatically return to normal  
(Overdrive) mode.  
For additional information about the gearshift lever and the transmission  
control switch operation refer to the Automatic Transmission  
Operation section of the Driving chapter.  
CIMS #506831  
com_bed-extender.225  
itdseq=72  
BED EXTENDER (IF EQUIPPED)  
Your vehicle may be equipped with a bed extender designed to extend  
the pickup box for larger loads.  
63  
PAGE: 63 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 64 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
To extend the bed extender:  
1. Lower tailgate.  
art=207cf332_b  
2. Pull the lever on each side of  
the bed extender to release it  
from the pickup box.  
3. Lift the bed extender over on to  
the tailgate.  
4. Evenly push down on the bed  
extender and push the lever in  
on each side locking it in place.  
art=221cf339_c  
To stow the bed extender, follow  
steps one through four in reverse  
order.  
The bed extender may be used to  
secure a load of up to 100 lb. (46  
kg) on the tailgate.  
The bed extender should always  
be kept in the stowed position with the tailgate closed when not  
in use.  
Activating bed extender Theft  
Deterrent Device:  
art=207cf335_b  
The following procedure can be  
done with the bed extender in the  
stowed or extended position.  
1. Locate the Phillips head screw  
in the middle of the vertical  
brace on the locking clip.  
2. Turn the screw  
counterclockwise until you hear  
an audible click.  
3. To deactivate, turn the screw clockwise until the locking clip moves  
freely.  
64  
PAGE: 64 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 65 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driver Controls  
To remove the bed extender:  
1. Extend the bed extender.  
art=207cf333_b  
2. Pull the lever on each side of  
the bed extender to unlock it.  
Make sure the locking clip screws  
are loose before removing the bed  
extender.  
3. Press the locking clips below  
the middle bar and lift the bed  
extender out of the channels on  
the “D” pillar.  
To install the bed extender, follow the removal procedure in reverse  
order.  
65  
PAGE: 65 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 66 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Locks and Security  
CIMS #1556896  
com_keys.ran  
KEYS  
itdseq=73  
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. You should always carry a  
second key with you in a safe place in case you require it in an  
emergency.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the SecuriLock௢ Passive Anti-theft  
system, your keys are coded to your vehicle; using a non-coded key will  
not permit your vehicle to start. If you lose your dealer supplied keys,  
replacement keys are available through your authorized dealer.  
CIMS #83545  
POWER DOOR LOCKS (IF EQUIPPED)  
com_powerdoor-title.ie  
itdseq=74  
CIMS #101856  
com_power-doors.03  
itdseq=75  
Press the top of the control to  
unlock all doors and the bottom to  
lock all doors.  
UNLOCK  
art=rancf508_a  
LOCK  
CIMS #1392205  
com_remote-title-ie.fly  
itdseq=76  
CIMS #1031085  
com_rem-entry.fly-panic  
itdseq=77  
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of  
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device  
must accept any interference received, including interference that may  
cause undesired operation.  
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party  
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to  
operate the equipment.  
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is  
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could  
be caused by:  
• weather conditions,  
• nearby radio towers,  
• structures around the vehicle, or  
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:  
66  
PAGE: 66 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 67 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Locks and Security  
• unlock the vehicle doors without  
a key.  
art=221cf353_a  
• lock all the vehicle doors without  
a key.  
• activate the personal alarm.  
If there are problems with the remote entry system, make sure to take  
ALL remote entry transmitters with you to your authorized dealer in  
order to aid in troubleshooting the problem.  
CIMS #1090284  
com_unlock.fly-ran  
itdseq=78  
Unlocking the doors  
1. Press  
and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior  
lamps will illuminate.  
2. Press  
doors.  
and release again within three seconds to unlock all the  
CIMS #1090285  
com_lock.fly-ran  
itdseq=79  
Locking the doors  
• Press and release to lock all the doors. The park lamps will flash  
once to confirm lock; if any of the doors are not properly closed, the  
lamps will not flash.  
• If  
is pressed a second time within three seconds, the lamps will  
flash again and the horn will chirp to confirm all doors are locked and  
closed. If either door is ajar the lamps will not flash and the horn will  
chirp twice.  
CIMS #1513131  
com_panic.fly-ran  
itdseq=80  
Sounding a panic alarm  
Press  
to activate the alarm. The horn will sound and the parklamps  
will flash for approximately 3 minutes. Press again or turn the ignition to  
the 4 (ON) position to deactivate, or wait for the alarm to timeout in 3  
minutes.  
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 2  
(LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position.  
CIMS #998940  
Replacing the battery  
com_battery-remote.fly  
itdseq=81  
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium  
battery CR2032 or equivalent.  
67  
PAGE: 67 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 68 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Locks and Security  
To replace the battery:  
art=dewcf305_b  
1. Twist a thin coin between the  
two halves of the remote entry  
transmitter near the key ring.  
DO NOT TAKE THE RUBBER  
COVER AND CIRCUIT BOARD  
OFF THE FRONT HOUSING OF  
THE REMOTE ENTRY  
TRANSMITTER.  
2. Do not wipe off any grease on  
the battery terminals on the  
back surface of the circuit  
board.  
art=f23mc007_a  
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when  
disposing of transmitter batteries.  
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry  
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the  
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery  
housing cavity.  
5. Snap the two halves back together.  
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter  
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter  
should operate normally after battery replacement.  
CIMS #999031  
com_lost-remote.fly  
itdseq=82  
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters  
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed  
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry  
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all  
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for  
reprogramming.  
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters  
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)  
available before beginning this procedure.  
68  
PAGE: 68 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 69 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Locks and Security  
Note: Ensure the brake pedal is not  
depressed during this sequence.  
art=f12dr029_a  
4
To reprogram the remote entry  
transmitters:  
3
1
5
1. Ensure the vehicle is  
electronically unlocked.  
2
2. Put the key in the ignition.  
3. Turn the key from the 2  
(LOCK) position to 3 (OFF).  
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within 10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF)  
position and 4 (ON). Note: The eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON)  
position.  
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming  
mode has been activated.  
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.  
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start  
the procedure over again.  
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry  
transmitter has been programmed.  
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.  
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished  
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20  
seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.  
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming  
mode has been exited.  
CIMS #1258992  
com_illuminate.fly-ran  
itdseq=83  
Illuminated entry  
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to  
unlock the door(s) or sound the personal alarm.  
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:  
• the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or  
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or  
• after 25 seconds of illumination.  
The inside lights will not turn off if:  
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or  
• any door is open.  
69  
PAGE: 69 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 70 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Locks and Security  
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps after several minutes if  
they are left on accidentally.  
CIMS #1090876  
com_securi-title-ie.fly  
itdseq=84  
SECURILOCKி PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)  
SecuriLock௢ passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization  
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being  
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The  
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.  
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be  
purchased from your authorized dealer. The authorized dealer can  
program your spare keys to your vehicle or you can program the keys  
yourself. Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to  
program the coded key.  
Note: The SecuriLock௢ passive anti-theft system is not compatible with  
non-Mazda aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may  
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.  
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to  
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same  
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these  
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These  
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a  
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the  
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on  
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.  
CIMS #1365421  
com_theft-indicator2.ran  
itdseq=85  
Anti-theft indicator  
The anti-theft indicator is located in  
the instrument cluster.  
art=ranis348_a  
Vehicles equipped with the SecuriLock௢ Passive Anti-theft system  
behave as follows:  
• When the ignition is in the 1(OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will  
flash once every 2 seconds for a total of 10 seconds to indicate the  
SecuriLock௢ system is functioning as a theft deterrent.  
• When the ignition is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for  
3 seconds to indicate a programmed key has been validated and the  
SecuriLock௢ Passive Anti-theft system has enabled the engine.  
Vehicles without the SecuriLock௢ Passive Anti-theft system behave as  
follows:  
70  
PAGE: 70 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 71 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Locks and Security  
• When the ignition is in the 1 (OFF/LOCK) position, the indicator will  
not flash.  
• When the igniton is in the 3 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for  
3 seconds to indicate the engine is enabled.  
CIMS #999040  
Replacement keys  
com_coded-key-replace.fly  
itdseq=86  
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,  
you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The  
key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will  
need to be programmed.  
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key  
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any  
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional  
spare or replacement keys.  
CIMS #999041  
Programming spare keys  
com_keyless-program.fly  
itdseq=87  
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and  
understand the entire procedure before you begin.  
Tips:  
• A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.  
• Only use Securilock௢ keys.  
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that  
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed  
key(s) readily accessible.  
• If no previously programmed coded keys are available, you must take  
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key(s)  
programmed.  
1. Insert a previously programmed  
coded key into the ignition.  
art=207cf313_a  
4
2. Turn the ignition from the 3  
(OFF) position to the 4 (ON)  
position. Keep the ignition in  
the 4 (ON) position for at least  
one second, but no more than  
10 seconds.  
3
1
5
2
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF)  
position, and remove the coded  
key from the ignition.  
71  
PAGE: 71 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 72 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Locks and Security  
4. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded  
key, insert the other previously programmed coded key into the  
ignition.  
5. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.  
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but  
not more than 10 seconds.  
6. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position, and remove the second  
key from the ignition.  
7. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed  
coded key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the  
ignition.  
8. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.  
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second.  
9. Your new unprogrammed key is now programmed.  
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s  
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and  
then go out. If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start  
your vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off  
rapidly. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to  
have the new key(s) programmed.  
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure  
from Step 1 for each additional key.  
72  
PAGE: 72 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 73 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
SEATING  
CIMS #1072391  
com_seats.231nad  
itdseq=88  
CIMS #1292966  
com_front-seat.mbs  
itdseq=89  
Adjusting the front manual seat (if equipped)  
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the  
vehicle is moving. The seat could slide too far leaving you  
unable to operate vital controls just when you need them.  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips. Sitting in a  
reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous  
because you cannot get the full protection from safety belts.  
During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide under the  
lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximum  
protection, sit well back and upright. The lap portion of the  
safety belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would  
concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area,  
causing serious injury. Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly  
and as low as possible.  
WARNING: The passenger sitting improperly out of position or  
with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the  
seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger  
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.  
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the  
floor.  
Lift the release bar to move seat  
forward or backward. Ensure that  
the seat is locked into place.  
art=ranss579_a  
73  
PAGE: 73 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 74 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Pull lever located at the side of the  
seat cushion up to adjust seatback.  
art=ranss580_a  
60/40 seat (if equipped)  
To gain access to the storage  
compartment in your armrest (if  
equipped), lift the latch to open lid.  
art=ranss582_a  
The 60/40 seat cupholder (if  
equipped) is detachable for  
cleaning.  
• Firmly grasp the bottom of the  
cup holder and pull up.  
To re-attach:  
• Slide the cupholder over the two pins located on the front of the 60%  
driver’s seat.  
• Press down until it is firmly latched into place.  
CIMS #1264846  
com_rear-access.mbs  
itdseq=90  
Passenger side rear access (if equipped)  
Pull up on the recliner handle. The  
seat will lean forward. Lift the  
art=ranss572_a  
release bar to move the seat forward  
to access the rear area of the cab.  
74  
PAGE: 74 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 75 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
To return seat to original position, slide the seat bottom back, then push  
the seatback up to lock it in place. The seat will lock, and you will have  
to use the release bar to move the seat back to the original position.  
CIMS #75601  
REAR SEATS  
com_rear_seat_adjust  
itdseq=91  
CIMS #899696  
Center facing jump seat (four–door Cab Plus 4) (if equipped)  
com_rear-jump_seat.mbs  
itdseq=92  
To open, pull seat assembly down,  
then raise seatback.  
art=ranss526_a  
To stow the seat, fold seat back  
down and raise seat assembly to the  
fully upright position.  
WARNING: Do not install a  
child seat in the center facing  
jump seats as there are no  
child restraints recommended  
for use in this seating position.  
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating  
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.  
CIMS #55015  
com_seatbelts.01  
itdseq=93  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS  
CIMS #1315586  
Personal Safety Systemி  
com_personal_safety_p221  
itdseq=94  
The Personal Safety System௢ provides an improved overall level of  
frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help  
further reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to  
analyze different occupant classifications and conditions and crash  
severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better  
protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations.  
Your vehicle’s Personal Safety System௢ consists of:  
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.  
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management  
retractors, and safety belt usage sensors.  
• Driver’s seat position sensor.  
• Front crash severity sensor.  
75  
PAGE: 75 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 76 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
• Front passenger sensing system  
• Passenger Airbag Off indicator light.  
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.  
• Restraint system warning light and back-up tone.  
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt  
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position  
sensor, and indicator lights.  
CIMS #1534971  
com_how_work-pss_ran  
itdseq=95  
How does the Personal Safety Systemி work?  
The Personal Safety System௢ can adapt the deployment strategy of your  
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant  
classification and conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors  
provides information to the Restraints Control Module (RCM). During a  
crash, the RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and/or either  
none, one, or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints  
based on crash severity and occupant classification and conditions.  
The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front  
seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with  
the system. Rather, it means the Personal Safety System௢ determined  
the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.) were not  
appropriate to activate these safety devices. Front airbags and  
pretensioners are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal  
collisions, not rollovers, side-impacts, or rear-impacts unless the collision  
causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.  
Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints  
The dual-stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag  
inflation energy. A lower, less forceful energy level is provided for more  
common, moderate-severity impacts. A higher energy level is used for  
the most severe impacts. Refer to Airbag Supplemental Restraints  
section in this chapter.  
Front crash severity sensor  
The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the  
severity of an impact. Positioned up front, it provides valuable  
information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact. This  
allows your Personal Safety System௢ to distinguish between different  
levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the  
dual-stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners.  
Driver’s seat position sensor  
The driver’s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System௢ to  
tailor the deployment level of the driver dual-stage airbag based on seat  
76  
PAGE: 76 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 77 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
position. The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting  
close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level.  
Front passenger sensing system  
For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force, and this  
force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close  
to the airbag when it begins to inflate. For some occupants, like infants  
in rear-facing child seats, this occurs because they are initially sitting  
very close to the airbag. For other occupants, this occurs when the  
occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats  
and they move forward during pre-crash braking. The most effective way  
to reduce the risk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants  
are properly restrained. Accident statistics suggest that children are  
much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in  
the front.  
WARNING: Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active air  
bag. If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front  
seat, move the seat all the way back.  
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under  
in the back seat and always properly use appropriate child  
restraints.  
The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the  
passenger front airbag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing  
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even with this technology,  
parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children  
in the rear seat. The sensor also turns off the airbag when the passenger  
seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of the airbag(s) after  
a collision.  
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has  
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag, the “pass airbag off” indicator  
will light and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal  
airbag is off. See Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag  
supplemental restraint system (SRS) section of this chapter.  
Front safety belt usage sensors  
The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and  
front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened. This information  
77  
PAGE: 77 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 78 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
allows your Personal Safety System௢ to tailor the airbag deployment and  
safety belt pretensioner activation depending upon safety belt usage.  
Refer to Safety belt usage sensors later in this chapter.  
Front outboard safety belt pretensioners  
The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are  
designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body  
during frontal collisions, and in side collisions and rollovers when the  
vehicle is equipped with the Safety Canopy௢ system. This helps increase  
the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the safety belt  
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of sufficient  
severity, together with the front airbags.  
Front outboard safety belt energy management retractors  
The front safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be  
pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in  
response to the occupant’s forward momentum. This helps reduce the  
risk of force-related injuries to the occupant’s chest by limiting the load  
on the occupant. Refer to Energy management retractors section in  
this chapter.  
Determining if the Personal Safety Systemி is operational  
The Personal Safety System௢ uses a warning light in the instrument  
cluster or a back-up tone to indicate the condition of the system. Refer  
to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter. Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System௢ is not  
required.  
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) monitors its own internal circuits  
and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints, crash sensor(s),  
safety belt pretensioners, front safety belt buckle sensors, front  
passenger sensing system, and the driver seat position sensor. In  
addition, the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the  
instrument cluster. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or  
more of the following.  
• The warning light will either flash or stay lit.  
• The warning light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is  
turned on.  
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the Personal  
Safety System௢ serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless  
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a  
collision.  
78  
PAGE: 78 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 79 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
CIMS #683646  
Safety restraints precautions  
com_belt-precautions.mbs  
itdseq=96  
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seatback upright  
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit  
where they can be properly restrained.  
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap  
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the  
child from injury in a collision.  
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback when the  
vehicles is moving. Adjusting the driver’s seat while the vehicle  
is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose control of the  
vehicle and have an accident. Adjust the driver’s seat only when  
the vehicle is stopped.  
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,  
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in  
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do  
not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not  
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your  
vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety  
belt.  
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific  
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one  
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the  
shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the  
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt  
around your neck over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a  
single belt for more than one person.  
79  
PAGE: 79 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 80 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: On Cab Plus 4 vehicles, do not open the rear door  
when the rear safety belt is still buckled.  
CIMS #102366  
Combination lap and shoulder belts  
com_manual-locking-belt.ran  
itdseq=97  
1. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle  
art=f12ss511_a  
closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from) until  
you hear a snap and feel it  
latch. Make sure the tongue is  
securely fastened in the buckle.  
2. To unfasten, push the release  
button and remove the tongue  
from the buckle.  
art=f12ss512_a  
CIMS #685451  
com_lapbelts.mbs  
itdseq=98  
Adjusting the center and rear center facing jump seat lap belts  
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.  
WARNING: The lap belts should fit snugly and as low as  
possible around the hips, not around the waist. Failure to  
position the lap belt correctly may cause serious injury in an  
accident.  
80  
PAGE: 80 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 81 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Insert the tongue into the correct  
buckle (the buckle closest to the  
direction the tongue is coming  
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the  
tongue at a right angle to the belt  
and pull across your lap until it  
reaches the buckle.  
art=mbsss111_a  
To tighten the belt, pull the loose  
end of the belt through the tongue  
until it fits snugly across the hips.  
art=mbsss112_a  
Shorten and fasten the belt  
when not in use to keep the belt  
away from door openings and  
available after unfolding the  
seats.  
For the rear jump seat, shorten and  
fold the belt into the seat when not  
in use.  
CIMS #803601  
Energy Management Feature  
com_energ-man-feat.ran2  
itdseq=99  
• This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management  
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce  
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.  
• This energy management system has a retractor assembly that is  
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is  
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.  
The front outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap  
and shoulder belts. The front passenger outboard safety belt has two  
types of locking modes described below:  
CIMS #73763  
Vehicle sensitive mode  
com_vehicle-locking-mode.01  
itdseq=100  
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length  
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle  
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner  
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph (8  
km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce  
forward movement of the driver and passengers.  
81  
PAGE: 81 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 82 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
CIMS #1124247  
com_when_use-title.mbs  
itdseq=101  
Automatic locking mode (outboard front passenger seating  
position only) for use with child safety seats  
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will  
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.  
CIMS #690605  
com_when-to-use-lok-mode.mbs  
itdseq=102  
The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.  
When to use the automatic locking mode  
• Any time a child safety seat is installed in a passenger front seat.  
Refer to Safety Restraints for Children or Safety Seats for Children  
later in this chapter.  
CIMS #1124248  
How to use the automatic locking mode (Outboard front passenger  
seating position only) for use with child safety seats  
com_how-to-use-loc-mode.mbs  
itdseq=103  
• Buckle the combination lap and  
shoulder belt.  
art=enoss522_c  
• Grasp the shoulder portion and  
pull downward until the entire  
belt is pulled out.  
art=exdss025_a  
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking  
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking  
mode.  
CIMS #1099341  
How to disengage the automatic locking mode  
com_cancel-lock-mode.mbs  
itdseq=104  
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract  
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the  
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.  
82  
PAGE: 82 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 83 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the entire safety belt  
system should be checked for proper operation by an authorized  
dealer. Verify that the ؆automatic locking retractors” in all  
outboard seating positions are functioning properly.  
Additionally check that the ؆automatic locking mode؆ feature  
for child safety seat in the passenger outboard seating position  
is functioning properly.  
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE  
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly “automatic locking  
retractor” feature or any other safety belt function is not  
operating properly when checked according to the procedures in  
Workshop Manual.  
WARNING: Failure to replace the Belt and Retractor assembly  
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.  
CIMS #594556  
com_pretensioner-title  
itdseq=105  
CIMS #1217381  
com_pretensioner.mbs  
itdseq=106  
Safety belt pretensioner  
Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the driver and  
front outboard passenger seating positions.  
The safety belt pretensioner is a device which removes excess webbing  
from the safety belt system. The safety belt pretensioner uses the same  
crash sensor system as the front airbag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS). When the safety belt pretensioner deploys, webbing from the lap  
and shoulder belt is tightened. Refer to the Safety belt maintenance  
section in this chapter.  
WARNING: The driver and front passenger safety belt system  
(including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be  
replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in  
deployment of front airbags and safety belt pretensioners.  
CIMS #911066  
Front safety belt height adjustment  
com_height-adjust.mbs  
itdseq=107  
Your vehicle has safety belt height adjustments for the driver and front  
passenger. Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across  
the middle of your shoulder.  
83  
PAGE: 83 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 84 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
• Regular Cab and four–door Cab  
Plus 4  
art=ranss514_c  
To lower the shoulder belt height, push the button and slide the height  
adjuster down. To raise the height of the shoulder belt, slide the height  
adjuster up. Pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in  
place.  
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the  
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust  
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the  
seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision.  
CIMS #598712  
Safety belt extension assembly  
com_extension-assy.j14  
itdseq=108  
If the safety belt assembly is too short for you, even when fully  
extended, 20 cm (8 inches) can be added to the safety belt assembly by  
adding a safety belt extension assembly. Safety belt extension assemblies  
can be obtained from your authorized Mazda dealership.  
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety  
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on  
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too  
short for you when fully extended.  
NOTE: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt  
across the torso.  
CIMS #1112659  
com_belt-maint.mbs  
itdseq=109  
Safety belt maintenance  
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work  
properly and are not damaged.  
NOTE: If unsure about the proper procedures, bring your vehicle to an  
authorized Mazda dealership for inspection. Inspect the safety belts to  
make sure there are no nicks, tears or cuts, replacing if necessary. Check  
the automatic locking retractor on the passenger outboard seating  
84  
PAGE: 84 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 85 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
position. All safety belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front  
safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if  
equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt  
guide on seatback (if equipped), child safety seat tether bracket  
assemblies (if equipped), and attaching hardware, should be inspected  
after a collision. Mazda recommends that all safety belt assemblies used  
in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced. However, if the collision  
was minor and an authorized Mazda technician finds that the belts do  
not show damage and continue to operate properly, they do not need to  
be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should  
also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is  
noted.  
The energy absorbing functions may have been activated in a collision so  
the restraints should be examined; if the front airbags have deployed, the  
pretensioners have also deployed and must be replaced — regardless of  
whether there was an occupant in the passenger seat or not.  
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the  
safety belt assembly under the above conditions could result in  
severe personal injuries in the event of a collision.  
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.  
CIMS #55029  
com_light-chime.01  
itdseq=110  
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime  
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a  
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.  
CIMS #55036  
com_operation.01  
itdseq=111  
Conditions of operation  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s safety belt is not  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The safety belt warning light  
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the  
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.  
The driver’s safety belt is  
buckled while the indicator  
light is illuminated and the  
warning chime is sounding...  
The safety belt warning light and  
warning chime turn off.  
85  
PAGE: 85 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 86 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s safety belt is  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position...  
The safety belt warning light and  
indicator chime remain off.  
CIMS #522761  
com_belt_minder-title  
itdseq=112  
CIMS #690991  
com_belt_minder.mbs  
itdseq=113  
BeltMinderா  
The BeltMinder௡ feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt  
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders by  
intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning  
light in the instrument cluster when the driver’s and front passenger’s  
safety belt is unbuckled.  
The BeltMinder௡ feature uses information from the front passenger  
sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and  
therefore potentially in need of a warning. To avoid activating the  
BeltMinder௡ feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat,  
warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined  
by the front passenger sensing system.  
Both the driver’s and passenger’s safety belt usages are monitored and  
either may activate the BeltMinder௡ feature. The warnings are the same  
for the driver and the front passenger. If the BeltMinder௡ warnings have  
expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver  
or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the BeltMinder௡  
feature.  
86  
PAGE: 86 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 87 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
If...  
Then...  
The driver’s and front  
passenger’s safety belts are  
buckled before the ignition  
switch is turned to the ON  
position or less than 1-2  
minutes have elapsed since the  
ignition switch has been turned  
ON...  
The BeltMinder௡ feature will not  
activate.  
The driver’s or front  
The BeltMinder௡ feature is activated -  
the safety belt warning light  
illuminates and the warning chime  
sounds for 6 seconds every 30  
seconds, repeating for approximately  
5 minutes or until the safety belts are  
buckled.  
passenger’s safety belt is not  
buckled when the vehicle has  
reached at least 3 mph (5  
km/h) and 1-2 minutes have  
elapsed since the ignition  
switch has been turned to  
ON...  
The driver’s or front  
The BeltMinder௡ feature is activated -  
passenger’s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light  
unbuckled for approximately 1 illuminates and the warning chime  
minute while the vehicle is  
traveling at least 3 mph (5  
km/h) and more than 1-2  
sounds for 6 seconds every 30  
seconds, repeating for approximately  
5 minutes or until the safety belts are  
minutes have elapsed since the buckled.  
ignition switch has been turned  
to ON...  
CIMS #598714  
com_safety_stats.j14  
itdseq=114  
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts  
(All statistics based on U.S. data):  
87  
PAGE: 87 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 88 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Reasons given...  
Consider...  
ЉCrashes are rare eventsЉ  
36,700 crashes occur every day.  
The more we drive, the more we are  
exposed to ЉrareЉ events, even for  
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be  
seriously injured in a crash during  
our lifetime.  
ЉI’m not going farЉ  
3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25  
miles of home.  
ЉBelts are uncomfortableЉ  
Safety belts are designed to enhance  
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -  
try different positions for the safety  
belt upper anchorage and seatback  
which should be as upright as  
possible; this can improve comfort.  
Prime time for an accident. Safety  
Belt Warning Chime reminds us to  
take a few seconds to buckle up.  
Safety belts, when used properly,  
reduce risk of death to front seat  
occupants by 45% in cars, and by  
60% in light trucks.  
ЉI was in a hurryЉ  
ЉSafety belts don’t workЉ  
ЉTraffic is lightЉ  
Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in  
single-vehicle crashes, many when  
no other vehicles are around.  
Possibly, but a serious crash can do  
much more than wrinkle your clothes,  
particularly if you are unbelted.  
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4  
times more often in vehicles with  
TWO or MORE people. Children and  
younger brothers/sisters imitate  
behavior they see.  
ЉBelts wrinkle my clothesЉ  
ЉThe people I’m with don’t  
wear beltsЉ  
88  
PAGE: 88 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 89 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Reasons given...  
Consider...  
ЉI have an airbagЉ  
Airbags offer greater protection when  
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags  
are not designed to inflate in rear and  
side crashes or rollovers.  
ЉI’d rather be thrown clearЉ  
Not a good idea. People who are  
ejected are 40 times more likely  
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent  
ejection, WE CAN’T ЉPICK OUR  
CRASHЉ.  
WARNING: Always wear the safety belt. Do not be tempted to  
sit on top of the belt to fool police or to defeat the warning  
system. The safety belt and safety belt warning system are  
there to protect your life.  
CIMS #982456  
One time disable  
com_one-time-dis.pass  
itdseq=115  
If at any time the driver/front passenger quickly buckles then unbuckles  
the safety belt for that seating position, the BeltMinder௡ is disabled for  
the current ignition cycle. The BeltMinder௡ feature will enable during the  
same ignition cycle if the occupant buckles and remains buckled for  
approximately 30 seconds. Confirmation is not given for the one time  
disable.  
CIMS #1515506  
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinderா feature  
com_mind_on-off.pass.beltlt  
itdseq=116  
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder௡ are  
deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating  
one seating position, do not buckle the other position as this will  
terminate the process.  
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before proceeding with the  
deactivation/activation programming procedure.  
Note: The driver and front passenger BeltMinder௡ features must be  
disabled/enabled separately. Both cannot be disable/enabled during the  
same key cycle.  
The driver and front passenger BeltMinder௡ features can be  
deactivated/activated by performing the following procedure:  
Before following the procedure, make sure that:  
• The parking brake is set  
89  
PAGE: 89 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 90 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
• The gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)  
• The ignition switch is in the OFF position  
• The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled  
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your  
BeltMinder௡, this system is designed to improve your chances of  
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend  
you leave the BeltMinder௡ system activated for yourself and  
others who may use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do  
not deactivate/activate the BeltMinder௡ feature while driving  
the vehicle.  
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT  
START THE ENGINE)  
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1  
minute)  
• Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt  
warning light turns off.  
3. For the seating position being disabled, at a moderate speed, buckle  
then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times, ending in the unbuckled state.  
(Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt  
warning light turns off.)  
• After Step 3, the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three  
seconds.  
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, at a moderate speed,  
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt.  
• This will disable the BeltMinder௡ feature for that seating position if it  
is currently enabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will  
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds.  
• This will enable the BeltMinder௡ feature for that seating position if it  
is currently disabled. As confirmation, the safety belt warning light will  
flash 4 times per second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the  
light off, then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times  
per second for 3 seconds again.  
90  
PAGE: 90 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 91 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
CIMS #1543011  
AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)  
com_air-bag-systems.mbs  
itdseq=117  
art=ranss583_a  
The airbag supplemental restraint system is designed to work in  
conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front  
outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries. The term  
“supplemental restraint” means the airbags are intended as a supplement  
to the safety belts. Airbags alone cannot protect as well as airbags plus  
safety belts in impacts for which the airbags are designed to deploy, and  
airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not  
deploy.  
The airbag supplemental restraint system consists of:  
• driver and passenger dual stage airbag modules (which include the  
inflators and airbags).  
• one or more impact and safing sensors.  
• the same indicator light, RCM (restraints control module) and  
diagnostic unit used for the Personal safety system.  
• Front passenger sensing system  
• Passenger airbag off indicator light.  
The airbag supplemental restraints are an integral part of the Personal  
Safety System. They are designed to be deployed in cases where the  
Personal Safety System has determined the occupant conditions and  
crash severity are appropriate to activate these devices. Refer to the  
Personal Safety System section in this chapter.  
CIMS #683851  
Important supplemental restraint system (SRS) precautions  
com_imp_precauts.mbs  
itdseq=118  
The supplemental restraint system is designed to work with the safety  
belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain  
upper body injuries.  
91  
PAGE: 91 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 92 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT  
inflate slowly or gently and the  
risk of injury from a deploying  
airbag is greatest close to the  
trim covering the airbag  
module. Always wear your  
safety belt.  
art=mbsss107_a  
WARNING: Airbags have been known to kill or injure a child in  
front facing child restraints. When placing a child safety seat in  
a front seating position including the center (if equipped), you  
should make sure that the passenger airbag is off. If the child  
safety seat is in the outboard seating position, slide the seat all  
the way back.  
WARNING: Do not install a  
child seat in a center facing  
jump seat.  
art=mbsss114_a  
WARNING: Rear facing child  
seats should NEVER be placed  
in front of an active airbag.  
art=mbsss113_b  
WARNING: All occupants of  
the vehicle, including the  
driver, should always properly  
wear their safety belts, even  
when an air bag supplemental  
restraint system (SRS) is  
provided.  
92  
PAGE: 92 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 93 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 25 cm (10  
inches) between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag  
module.  
WARNING: Never place your arm or feet over the airbag  
module as a deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures  
or other injuries.  
Steps you can take to properly position yourself away from the airbag:  
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the  
pedals comfortably.  
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright  
position.  
WARNING: Do not put anything on or over the airbag module  
including hands or feet. Placing objects on or over the airbag  
inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the  
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.  
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the  
Airbag Supplemental Restraint System or its fuses. See your  
authorized Mazda dealership.  
WARNING: Modifications to the front end of the vehicle,  
including frame, bumper, front end body structure, tow hooks  
and snow plows may effect the performance of the airbag  
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front  
end of the vehicle.  
WARNING: Additional equipment may effect the performance  
of the airbag sensors increasing the risk of injury. Consult your  
authorized Mazda dealership before installation of additional  
equipment.  
CIMS #832821  
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer  
protection to an occupant in the center front seating position.  
com_imp_precauts.center  
itdseq=119  
93  
PAGE: 93 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 94 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
CIMS #1062867  
com_children.mbs  
itdseq=120  
Children and airbags  
For additional important safety information, read all information on  
safety restraints in this guide.  
WARNING: Do not install a  
child seat in a center facing  
jump seat.  
art=mbsss114_a  
WARNING: Airbags can kill or  
injure a child in a child seat.  
NEVER place a rear-facing  
child seat in front of an active  
airbag. If you must use a  
forward-facing child seat in the  
front seat, move the seat all  
the way back.  
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating  
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit  
where they can be properly restrained.  
CIMS #683852  
com_how_work.mbs  
itdseq=121  
How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work?  
The airbag SRS is designed to  
activate when the vehicle sustains  
sufficient longitudinal deceleration.  
art=comss002_a  
The fact that the airbags did not  
inflate in a collision does not mean  
that something is wrong with the  
system. Rather, it means the forces  
were not of the type sufficient to  
cause activation. Airbags are  
designed to inflate in frontal and  
near-frontal collisions, not rollover,  
side-impact, or rear-impacts.  
94  
PAGE: 94 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 95 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
The airbags inflate and deflate  
rapidly upon activation. After airbag  
deployment, it is normal to notice a  
smoke-like, powdery residue or  
smell the burnt propellant. This may  
consist of cornstarch, talcum  
art=comss003_b  
powder (to lubricate the bag) or  
sodium compounds (e.g., baking  
soda) that result from the  
combustion process that inflates the  
airbag. Small amounts of sodium  
hydroxide may be present which  
may irritate the skin and eyes, but  
none of the residue is toxic.  
While the system is designed to help  
reduce serious injuries, it may also  
cause minor abrasions, swelling or temporary hearing loss. Because  
airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk  
of death or serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or  
internal injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly  
restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag  
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important that occupants be properly  
restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while  
maintaining vehicle control.  
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after  
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation or you may be  
burned.  
WARNING: If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not  
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag  
is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of  
injury in a collision.  
CIMS #683853  
com_deter_operational.mbs  
itdseq=122  
Determining if the system is operational  
The SRS uses readiness lights in the instrument cluster or a tone to  
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to the Airbag readiness  
section in the Instrumentation chapter. Routine maintenance of the  
airbag is not required.  
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:  
95  
PAGE: 95 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 96 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
• The readiness lights will either  
flash or stay lit.  
art=ranis319_a  
• The readiness lights will not  
illuminate immediately after  
ignition is turned on.  
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat  
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.  
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced  
at your authorized Mazda dealership immediately.  
WARNING: Unless serviced, the system may not function  
properly in the event of a collision.  
CIMS #683854  
com_disposing.mbs  
itdseq=123  
Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles (including safety  
belt pretensioners)  
For disposal of safety belt pretensioners, airbags, or airbag equipped  
vehicles, see your authorized Mazda dealership or qualified technician.  
Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel.  
CIMS #1534973  
com_tell-tale.ran  
itdseq=124  
Front passenger sensing system  
The front passenger sensing system will turn off the front passenger’s  
frontal air bag under certain conditions. The driver’s frontal air bag is not  
part of the front passenger sensing system. The front passenger sensing  
system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s seat and  
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a  
properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger’s frontal  
air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory  
requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208  
and is designed to turn off the front passenger’s frontal air bag if:  
• the front passenger seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in  
the front seat,  
• the system determines that a small child is present in a rear-facing  
child seat that is installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions.  
• the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing  
child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer’s  
instructions,  
• the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat,  
96  
PAGE: 96 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 97 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
• a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of  
time,  
WARNING: Even with Advanced Restraints Systems, children  
12 and under should be properly restrained in the back seat (if  
equipped).  
When the front passenger seat is occupied and the sensing system has  
turned off the passenger’s frontal air bag, the Љpassenger air bag offЉ or  
Љpass air bag offЉ indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the  
front passenger frontal air bag is off. When the front passenger seat is  
not occupied (empty seat) or in the event that the front passenger  
frontal air bag is enabled (may inflate), the indicator light will be unlit.  
The indicator light is located in the  
center stack of the instrument  
panel. To confirm the Љpass airbag  
lightЉ is functional, it will  
art=dnoss529_a  
momentarily illuminate when the  
ignition is turned to the ON  
position.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to turn off the front  
passenger’s frontal air bag when a rear facing child seat, a forward-facing  
child restraint, or a booster seat is detected. If the child restraint has  
been installed and the indicator is not lit, then turn the vehicle off,  
remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint  
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions.  
The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable (may inflate)  
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag anytime the system senses that  
a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat.  
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the air bag to be  
enabled, the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit to remind you that the  
air bag is enabled (may inflate).  
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the front passenger’s seat, but the  
Љpassenger air bag offЉ or Љpass air bag offЉ indicator is lit, it could be  
that the person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, turn the  
vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright  
position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with  
the person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle and have the  
person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the  
system to detect that person and then enable the passenger’s air bag. If  
the indicator lamp remains lit even after this, then the occupant should  
be advised to ride in the back seat.  
97  
PAGE: 97 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 98 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Pass Airbag Off  
Indicator Lamp  
Occupant  
Passenger Airbag  
Empty seat  
Small child in child  
safety seat or booster  
Unlit  
Lit  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Small child with safety Lit  
belt buckled or  
Disabled  
unbuckled  
Adult  
Unlit  
Enabled  
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it’s  
very important that they continue to sit upright, with their back against  
the seatback, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor while the  
vehicle is still in motion. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of  
injury in a crash event. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,  
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or  
both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.  
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat  
back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion  
and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system,  
resulting in serious injury or death in a crash.  
Always sit upright against your seatback, with your feet on the  
floor.  
In case there is a problem with the  
passenger sensing system, the  
airbag readiness lamp in the  
art=dewii019_a  
instrument cluster will stay lit. Do  
NOT attempt to repair or service the system; take your vehicle  
immediately to the dealer.  
WARNING: The front passenger airbag is not designed to offer  
protection to an occupant in the center seating position.  
WARNING: An out of position front center occupant could  
affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system.  
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to  
accommodate a person with disabilities, contact the Mazda Customer  
98  
PAGE: 98 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 99 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer  
Assistance section of this Owner’s Guide.  
The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects  
placed on the seat cushion. For most objects that are in the front  
passenger seat, the passenger airbag will be disabled. Even though the  
passenger airbag is disabled, the Љpass airbag offЉ light may or may not  
be illuminated according to the table below.  
Pass Airbag Off  
Indicator Lamp  
Objects  
Passenger Airbag  
Small (i.e. 3 ring  
binder, small purse,  
bottled water)  
Unlit  
Disabled  
Medium (i.e. heavy  
briefcase, fully packed  
luggage)  
Empty seat, or small  
to medium object with  
safety belt buckled  
Lit  
Lit  
Disabled  
Disabled  
WARNING: Any alteration/modification to the front passenger  
seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing  
system.  
CIMS #52677  
com_safety-for-kids  
itdseq=125  
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN  
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety  
restraints for children. Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system  
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags.  
CIMS #683856  
Important child restraint precautions  
com_imp_precautions.mbs  
itdseq=126  
NOTE: You are required by law to use a child-restraint system in the  
U.S. and Canada. Many states require that children use approved booster  
seats until they are eight years old. Check your local and state or  
provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children  
in your vehicle.  
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap  
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the  
child from injury in a collision.  
99  
PAGE: 99 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 100 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
NOTE: Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any  
infant or child restraint you might use.  
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump  
seat.  
CIMS #1065521  
com_safety_belts.mbs  
itdseq=127  
Children and safety belts  
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat.  
Children who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your  
child safety seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.  
Follow all the important safety restraint and airbag precautions that  
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.  
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can  
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or  
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child  
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt  
fit.  
WARNING: Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets  
unattended in your vehicle. Leaving a child or an animal  
unattended in a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot weather,  
temperatures inside a vehicle can become high enough to cause  
brain damage or even death. Always take all children and  
animals with you or leave a responsible person with them.  
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous.  
This could result in someone being badly injured or even killed.  
They could play with power windows or other controls, or even  
make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in your vehicle  
with children.  
CIMS #992731  
Child booster seats  
com_booster_seat.mazda  
itdseq=128  
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh  
40 pounds and are around 4 years of age. Although the lap/shoulder belt  
will provide some protection, these children are still too small for  
lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk of serious  
injury.  
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who  
have outgrown child safety seats, Mazda recommends use of a  
belt-positioning booster seat.  
100  
PAGE: 100 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 101 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the  
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees  
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better  
and more comfortably for growing children.  
When children should use booster seats  
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the  
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and  
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about  
80 lb. (about 8 to 12 years old).  
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these  
questions:  
• Can the child sit all the way back  
against the vehicle seat back with  
knees bent comfortably at the  
edge of the seat without  
art=cgrss526_b  
slouching?  
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?  
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?  
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?  
WARNING: Booster seats must be installed only in seating  
positions equipped with a combination lap/shoulder belt.  
Types of booster seats  
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:  
• Those that are backless.  
art=mbsss109_a  
If your backless booster seat has a  
removable shield, remove the  
shield and use the lap/shoulder  
belt. If a seating position has a  
low seat back and no head  
restraint, a backless booster seat  
may place your child’s head (top  
of ear level) above the top of the  
seat. In this case, use a  
high-backed booster seat.  
101  
PAGE: 101 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 102 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
• Those with a high back.  
art=mbsss110_a  
If, with a backless booster seat,  
you cannot find a seating position  
that adequately supports your  
child’s head, a high back booster  
seat would be a better choice.  
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with  
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lb..  
Children and booster seats vary widely in size and shape. Choose a  
booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up  
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the  
chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The drawings  
below compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably  
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder.  
art=251ss030_a  
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh  
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this  
condition.  
The importance of shoulder belts  
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s  
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should  
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster  
seat with combination lap/shoulder belts.  
WARNING: Follow all instructions provided by the  
manufacturer of the booster seat.  
102  
PAGE: 102 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 103 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or  
behind the back because it eliminates the protection for the  
upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or  
death in a collision.  
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a  
child. They can slide around and increase the likelihood of  
injury or death in a collision.  
CIMS #52706  
com_child-seat-title  
itdseq=129  
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN  
CIMS #1250809  
Child and infant or child safety seats  
com_child-safe-seats.mbs2  
itdseq=130  
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the  
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the  
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the  
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or  
collision.  
When installing a child safety seat:  
• Review and follow the information  
presented in the Airbag  
art=comss006_a  
Supplemental Restraint System  
section in this chapter.  
• Use the correct safety belt buckle  
for that seating position (the  
buckle closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from).  
• Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle until you hear a  
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the  
buckle.  
WARNING: Do not install a child seat in a center facing jump  
seat.  
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety  
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,  
to prevent accidental unbuckling.  
103  
PAGE: 103 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 104 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
• Place seat back in upright position.  
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic  
locking mode (passenger side front seat).  
• Top tether anchors can be used for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg)  
in a child restraint, and to provide upper torso restraint for children  
up to 80 pounds (36 kg) using an upper torso harness and a  
belt-positioning booster.  
Mazda recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether  
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position which is capable  
of providing a tether anchorage. For more information on top tether  
straps, refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps.  
WARNING: Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s  
instructions included with the safety seat you put in your  
vehicle. If you do not install and use the safety seat properly,  
the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision.  
CIMS #1124877  
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder  
belts (front outboard passenger seat only)  
com_install-seat_title.mazda  
itdseq=131  
CIMS #1062868  
com_install-seat.mbs  
itdseq=132  
1. Position the child safety seat in  
a seat with a combination lap  
and shoulder belt.  
art=f12ss008_a  
WARNING: If there is a tether on the child safety seat, attach  
it to the tether anchor point. Refer to Attaching child safety  
seats with tether straps in this chapter.  
WARNING: Rear facing child seats should NEVER be placed in  
front of an active airbag.  
104  
PAGE: 104 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 105 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt  
and then grasp the shoulder  
belt and lap belt together.  
art=f12ss009_a  
art=f12ss010_a  
art=exdss029_a  
3. While holding the shoulder and  
lap belt portions together, route  
the tongue through the child  
seat according to the child seat  
manufacturer’s instructions. Be  
sure the belt webbing is not  
twisted.  
4. Insert the belt tongue into the  
proper buckle (the buckle  
closest to the direction the  
tongue is coming from) for that  
seating position until you hear  
and feel the latch engage. Make  
sure the tongue is latched  
securely by pulling on it.  
105  
PAGE: 105 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 106 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
5. To put the retractor in the  
automatic locking mode, grasp  
the shoulder portion of the belt  
and pull downward until all of  
the belt is extracted and a click  
is heard.  
art=f12ss012_a  
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate  
it is in the automatic locking mode.  
7. Pull the lap belt portion across  
the child seat toward the buckle  
and pull up on the shoulder belt  
while pushing down with knee  
on the child seat.  
art=f12ss013_a  
8. Allow the safety belt to retract  
to remove any slack in the belt.  
art=musss552_b  
9. Before placing the child in the  
seat, forcibly tilt the seat  
forward and back to make sure  
the seat is securely held in  
place. To check this, grab the  
seat at the belt path and  
attempt to move it side to side  
and forward. There should be  
no more than one inch of  
movement for proper installation.  
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is  
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more  
belt out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat  
Steps two through nine.  
11. See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps in this chapter.  
106  
PAGE: 106 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 107 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.  
CIMS #1062869  
com_built-in_anchors.mbs  
itdseq=133  
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps  
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which  
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether  
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact  
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a  
tether strap.  
The tether anchors in your vehicle are located on the back of the front  
seat cushion.  
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions  
(shown from top view):  
• Bucket seats  
art=ranss564_a  
• 60/40 seats  
art=mbsss100_a  
WARNING: Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate  
tether anchor as shown. The tether strap may not work  
properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether  
anchor.  
107  
PAGE: 107 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 108 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seat tethers to a  
single tether anchor. In a crash, on anchor may not be strong  
enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may  
break, causing serious injury or death.  
1. Position the child safety seat on the front seat cushion.  
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.  
art=ranss573_a  
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.  
The tether anchor is located on the  
rear lower portion of the passenger  
seat.  
art=ranss574_a  
108  
PAGE: 108 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 109 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
4. Clip the tether strap to the  
anchor.  
art=ranss575_a  
WARNING: If the tether strap  
is clipped incorrectly, the child  
safety seat may not be  
art=ranss576_a  
retained properly in the event  
of a collision.  
Center seating location 60/40  
seats with folding armrest  
art=ranss577_a  
When installing a child safety seat in the center position, route the tether  
strap over the center arm rest and clip it to the center anchor.  
109  
PAGE: 109 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 110 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Seating and Safety Restraints  
WARNING: If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly, the child  
safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a  
collision.  
5. Refer to the Installing child safety seats in combination lap and  
shoulder belt seating positions section of this chapter for further  
instructions to secure the child safety seat.  
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the  
manufacturer’s instructions.  
WARNING: If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk  
of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases.  
110  
PAGE: 110 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 111 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #1434023  
com_drive-veh-utility  
itdseq=134  
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS  
Utility vehicles and trucks handle  
differently than passenger cars in  
the various driving conditions that  
are encountered on streets,  
art=j14gf003_a  
highways and off-road. Utility  
vehicles and trucks are not designed  
for cornering at speeds as high as  
passenger cars any more than  
low-slung sports cars are designed  
to perform satisfactorily under  
off-road conditions.  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious  
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:  
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;  
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;  
• Keep tires properly inflated;  
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and  
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat  
belt. All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants  
must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury  
or ejection.  
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information  
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional  
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.  
CIMS #1434024  
com_veh-handle-title  
itdseq=135  
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS  
CIMS #1434025  
com_veh-system  
itdseq=136  
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)  
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when selected) has the ability to  
use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may  
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a  
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.  
111  
PAGE: 111 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 112 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Power is supplied to all four wheels  
through a transfer case or power  
art=supfw001_a  
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow  
you to select different drive modes  
as necessary. Information on  
transfer case operation and shifting  
procedures can be found in the  
Driving chapter. Information on  
transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this  
information before you operate your vehicle.  
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD  
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting  
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to  
speed and is not cause for concern.  
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD  
and AWD vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may  
accelerate better than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction  
situations, it won’t stop any faster than two-wheel drive  
vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.  
CIMS #1434026  
com_veh-dr-differs  
itdseq=137  
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles  
SUV and trucks can differ from  
some other vehicles in a few  
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may  
be:  
art=supfw011_a  
• Higher – to allow higher load  
carrying capacity and to allow it  
to travel over rough terrain  
without getting hung up or  
damaging underbody components.  
• Shorter – to give it the capability  
to approach inclines and drive  
over the crest of a hill without  
getting hung up or damaging  
underbody components. All other  
things held equal, a shorter  
wheelbase may make your vehicle  
quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer  
wheelbase.  
112  
PAGE: 112 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 113 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
• Narrower — to provide greater  
maneuverability in tight spaces,  
particularly in off-road use.  
art=supfw012_a  
As a result of the above dimensional  
differences, SUV’s and trucks often  
will have a higher center of gravity  
and a greater difference in center of  
gravity between the loaded and  
unloaded condition.  
These differences that make your  
vehicle so versatile also make it  
handle differently than an ordinary  
passenger car.  
CIMS #599889  
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING  
com_tire_grade_info.j14  
itdseq=138  
New vehicles are fitted with tires  
that have a rating on them called  
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality  
grades can be found where  
applicable on the tire sidewall  
between tread shoulder and  
maximum section width. For  
example:  
art=f12mc027_b  
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A  
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United  
States Department of Transportation has set.  
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger  
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,  
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim  
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in  
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).  
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.  
Department of Transportation requires Mazda to give you the following  
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.  
CIMS #54583 com_treads.01  
itdseq=139  
Treadwear  
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of  
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified  
113  
PAGE: 113 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 114 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one  
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire  
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual  
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the  
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and  
differences in road characteristics and climate.  
CIMS #599890  
Traction AA A B C  
com_traction_a-b-c.j14  
itdseq=140  
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The  
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured  
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of  
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction  
performance.  
NOTE: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on  
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,  
cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.  
CIMS #600046  
com_temp_a-b-c.j14  
itdseq=141  
Temperature A B C  
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the  
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat  
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory  
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire  
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to  
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance  
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle  
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of  
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by  
law.  
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established  
for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.  
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either  
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and  
possible tire failure.  
CIMS #1272072  
TIRES  
com_tire-intro  
itdseq=142  
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they  
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.  
CIMS #1272100  
Glossary of tire terminology  
com_glossary-of-tire-terms  
itdseq=143  
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,  
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle  
can carry.  
114  
PAGE: 114 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 115 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of  
each tire providing information about the tire brand and  
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred  
to as DOT code.  
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.  
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing  
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s  
load carrying capability.  
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a  
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].  
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase  
the tire’s load carrying capability.  
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.  
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.  
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has  
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and  
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).  
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on  
the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.  
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the  
front door.  
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.  
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.  
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that  
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.  
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly  
upon which the tire beads are seated.  
CIMS #1513806  
INFLATING YOUR TIRES  
com_gen-tire-in.tpms.mazda  
itdseq=144  
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly  
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure  
without appearing flat.  
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the  
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if  
required.  
115  
PAGE: 115 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 116 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check  
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate  
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Mazda.  
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare  
(if equipped), at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly  
urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station  
gauges may be inaccurate. Mazda recommends the use of a digital or dial  
type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.  
CIMS #1513866  
com_tire-inf.tpms.mazda  
itdseq=145  
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire  
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause  
uneven treadwear patterns.  
NOTE: If you are driving the vehicle at its maximum weight load, make  
sure the tire inflation pressure is correct for the weight load on the tires.  
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire  
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation  
or ؆blowout؆, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and  
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall  
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and  
internal damage to the tire. It also may result in unnecessary  
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.  
A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to  
be flat!  
Always inflate your tires to the Mazda recommended inflation pressure  
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found  
on the tire. The Mazda recommended tire inflation pressure is found on  
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located  
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire  
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and  
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.  
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’  
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the  
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally  
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure  
which can be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label  
or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s  
door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the  
recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or  
Tire Label.  
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also  
change. A 10° F (6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding  
116  
PAGE: 116 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 117 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures  
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found  
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.  
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more  
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are  
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above  
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold  
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.  
To check the pressure in your tire(s):  
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving  
even a mile.  
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check  
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure  
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air  
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air  
pressure when tires are hot.  
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire  
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.  
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure  
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in  
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.  
4. Replace the valve cap.  
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.  
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the  
other tires. For T-type/mini-spare tires (see T-Type/Mini-Spare Tire  
Information section for description): Store and maintain at 60psi (4.15  
bars). For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires (see Dissimilar Spare  
Tire/Wheel Information section for description): Store and maintain at  
the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Safety  
Compliance Certification Label.  
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other  
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air  
leak.  
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or  
bulges.  
CIMS #1272124  
com_care-for-tires  
itdseq=146  
TIRE CARE  
CIMS #1444638  
com_tire-inspection  
itdseq=147  
Inspecting your tires  
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and  
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the  
117  
PAGE: 117 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 118 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from  
the tire and make necessary repairs. Also inspect the tire sidewalls for  
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear. If  
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and  
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,  
tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be  
used because they are more likely to blow out or fail.  
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear  
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and  
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:  
CIMS #1272512  
com_tire-wear  
Tire wear  
itdseq=148  
When the tread is worn down to  
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must  
be replaced to help prevent your  
vehicle from skidding and  
art=tsnmc001_a  
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear  
indicators, or “wear bars”, which  
look like narrow strips of smooth  
rubber across the tread will appear  
on the tire when the tread is worn  
down to 1/16th of an inch (2 mm).  
When the tire tread wears down to  
the same height as these “wear bars”, the tire is worn out and must be  
replaced.  
CIMS #1512511  
com_tire-damage  
itdseq=149  
Damage  
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as  
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and  
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected  
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged  
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also  
recommended.  
118  
PAGE: 118 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 119 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #1512512 com_tire-age  
itdseq=150  
WARNING: Age  
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as  
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,  
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their  
lives.  
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of  
tread wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent  
high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and  
may require tires to be replaced more frequently.  
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road  
tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been  
used.  
CIMS #1519956  
itdseq=151  
com_usdot  
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)  
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This  
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of  
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for  
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.  
This begins with the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all  
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code  
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size  
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was  
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After  
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th  
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for  
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect  
requires a recall.  
CIMS #1497287  
Tire Replacement Requirements  
com_tire-rpl-06tpms  
itdseq=152  
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and  
handling capability.  
119  
PAGE: 119 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 120 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the  
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric  
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those  
originally provided by Mazda. The recommended tire and wheel  
size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or edge  
of the driver’s door. If this information is not found on these  
labels then you should consult your Mazda dealer. Use of any  
tire or wheel not recommended by Mazda can affect the safety  
and performance of your vehicle, which could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death. Additionally the use of  
non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering,  
suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If  
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an  
authorized dealer.  
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you  
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the  
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional  
precautions listed below. If the beads do not seat at the  
maximum pressure indicated, re-lubricate and try again.  
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi  
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the  
following precautions must be taken to protect the person  
mounting the tire:  
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.  
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.  
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet away from the tire wheel assembly.  
4. Use both eye and ear protection.  
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi greater than the  
maximum pressure, a Mazda Dealer or other tire service professional  
should do the mounting.  
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the  
person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft. away from the tire  
wheel assembly.  
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road  
tires are replaced on your vehicle.  
120  
PAGE: 120 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 121 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be  
replaced as a pair.  
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on  
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.  
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Mazda Motor  
Corporation may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System.  
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your  
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some  
component of the TPMS may be damaged.  
CIMS #1272513  
Safety practices  
com_tire-safety-practices  
itdseq=153  
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.  
• Observe posted speed limits  
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns  
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road  
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking  
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do  
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire  
and cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three  
to five seconds.  
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).  
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
Highway hazards  
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you  
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the  
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but  
your safety is more important.  
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you  
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your  
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and  
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,  
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If  
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair  
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.  
121  
PAGE: 121 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 122 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #1302692  
com_tire-align-mazda  
itdseq=154  
Tire and wheel alignment  
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your  
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your  
vehicle seems to pull to one side, vibrate or shake when you’re driving,  
the wheels may be out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a  
Mazda dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.  
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid  
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician  
at a Mazda dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles and those with an  
independent rear suspension require alignment of all four wheels.  
The tire should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and  
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.  
NOTE: When it is time to replace front tires with new ones, this is an  
ideal time to perform an alignment. New tires should be balanced at the  
time they are installed.  
CIMS #1350081  
com_rotate-tires-mazda  
itdseq=155  
Tire rotation  
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the  
Scheduled maintenance section of the Maintenance and  
Specifications chapter) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing  
better tire performance and longer tire life.  
122  
PAGE: 122 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 123 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)  
vehicles (front tires at top of  
diagram)  
art=f23mc121_a  
123  
PAGE: 123 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 124 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)  
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive  
(4WD)/All Wheel Drive (AWD)  
vehicles (front tires at top of  
diagram)  
art=f23mc122_a  
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.  
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a  
Mazda dealership to check for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire  
imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation.  
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A  
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is  
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If  
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use  
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.  
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked  
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.  
CIMS #  
com_sidewall-info  
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL  
itdseq=156  
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to  
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This  
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of  
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for  
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.  
124  
PAGE: 124 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 125 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #1272097  
Information on “P” type tires  
com_pass-tire-information  
itdseq=157  
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a  
tire size, load index and speed  
rating. The definitions of these  
items are listed below. (Note that  
the tire size, load index and speed  
rating for your vehicle may be  
different from this example.)  
art=f23mc119_a  
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that may be used for  
service on cars, SUVs, minivans  
and light trucks.  
Note: If your tire size does not  
begin with a letter this may mean it  
is designated by either ETRTO  
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire  
Manufacturing Association).  
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from  
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the  
wider the tire.  
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width.  
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change  
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the  
new wheel diameter.  
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how  
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your  
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the  
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods  
of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.  
The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load  
and inflation pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted  
for the difference in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130  
km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the  
following chart.  
125  
PAGE: 125 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 126 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not  
required by federal law.  
Letter rating  
Speed rating - mph (km/h)  
81 mph (130 km/h)  
87 mph (140 km/h)  
99 mph (159 km/h)  
106 mph (171 km/h)  
112 mph (180 km/h)  
118 mph (190 km/h)  
124 mph (200 km/h)  
130 mph (210 km/h)  
149 mph (240 km/h)  
168 mph (270 km/h)  
186 mph (299 km/h)  
M
N
Q
R
S
T
U
H
V
W
Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph (240  
km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For those with  
a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire  
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.  
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with  
the letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal  
standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code  
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire  
size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the  
tire was built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of  
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501  
means the 25th week of 2001. The numbers in between are  
identification codes used for traceability. This information is used to  
contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.  
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or  
AT: All Terrain, or  
AS: All Season.  
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number  
of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire  
tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply  
materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon,  
polyester, and others.  
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and  
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the Safety  
126  
PAGE: 126 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 127 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Compliance Certification Label, which is located on the B-Pillar or  
the edge of the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your  
vehicle.  
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades  
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the  
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150  
would wear one and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the government  
course as a tire graded 100.  
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,  
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement  
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test  
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor  
traction performance.  
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,  
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its  
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a  
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.  
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire  
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at  
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is  
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation  
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set  
lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.  
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such  
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.  
127  
PAGE: 127 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 128 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #1272098  
com_lt-tire-information  
itdseq=158  
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type  
tires  
“LT” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
art=f23mc120_b  
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated  
by the Tire and Rim Association  
(T&RA), that is intended for  
service on light trucks.  
2. Load Range/Load Inflation  
Limits: Indicates the tire’s  
load-carrying capabilities and its  
inflation limits.  
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)  
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates  
the maximum load and tire  
pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined as four tires on the  
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).  
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the  
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;  
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.  
128  
PAGE: 128 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 129 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #1280261  
com_t-tire-information  
itdseq=159  
Information on “T” type tires  
“T” type tires have some additional  
information beyond those of “P”  
type tires; these differences are  
described below:  
art=f23mc123_b  
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire  
size.  
Note: The temporary tire size for  
your vehicle may be different from  
this example.  
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,  
designated by the Tire and Rim  
Association (T&RA), that is  
intended for temporary service  
on cars, SUVs, minivans and  
light trucks.  
2. 145: Indicates the nominal  
width of the tire in millimeters  
from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the  
number, the wider the tire.  
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to  
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.  
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.  
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.  
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change  
your wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the  
new wheel diameter.  
CIMS #1450451  
com_placard-loc-ref  
itdseq=160  
Location of the tire label  
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size  
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door. Refer to the payload description and graphic in the  
Vehicle loading — with and without a trailer section.  
129  
PAGE: 129 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 130 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #1298876  
com_tpms-title  
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)  
itdseq=161  
CIMS #1497798 com_tpms.06  
itdseq=162  
Each tire, including the spare (if  
provided), should be checked  
art=winis320_a  
monthly when cold and inflated to  
the inflation pressure recommended  
by the vehicle manufacturer on the  
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires  
of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire  
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation  
pressure for those tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire  
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure  
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.  
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should  
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the  
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the  
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces  
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling  
and stopping ability.  
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire  
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire  
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger  
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC  
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the  
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful  
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,  
including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
WARNING: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a  
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire  
pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly)  
using a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this chapter.  
Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase  
the risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and  
personal injury.  
130  
PAGE: 130 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 131 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Changing tires with TPMS  
art=229mc500_b  
Each road tire is equipped with  
a tire pressure sensor fastened  
to the inside rim of the wheel.  
The pressure sensor is covered  
by the tire and is not visible  
unless the tire is removed. The  
pressure sensor is located  
opposite (180 degrees) from the  
valve stem. Care must be taken  
when changing the tire to avoid  
damaging the sensor. It is  
recommended that you always have  
your tires serviced by an authorized  
dealer.  
The tire pressure should be checked  
periodically (at least monthly) using  
an accurate tire gauge, refer to  
Inflating your tires in this chapter.  
CIMS #1526106  
Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
com_understand-tpms.j14  
itdseq=163  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four  
road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The Low  
Tire Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is 25% below the  
pressure listed on the Tire Label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of  
the driver’s door. Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under  
inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire  
pressure. Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF,  
your tire pressure still needs to be checked.  
When your temporary spare tire is installed (if equipped)  
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary  
spare (T-type spare/Mini spare or Dissimilar spare), the TPMS system  
will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road  
wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle.  
To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System,  
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your  
vehicle. For additional information, refer to Changing tires with TPMS  
in this section.  
131  
PAGE: 131 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 132 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
When you believe your system is not operating properly  
The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you  
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is  
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Please refer to the  
following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System:  
132  
PAGE: 132 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 133 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required  
Warning Light  
Solid Warning Light Tire(s)  
under-inflated  
1. Check your tire pressure to  
ensure tires are properly  
inflated; refer to Inflating  
your tires in this chapter.  
2. After inflating your tires to  
the manufacturer’s  
recommended inflation  
pressure as shown on the Tire  
Label (located on the edge of  
driver’s door or the B-Pillar)  
the vehicle must be driven for  
at least two minutes over 20  
mph (32 km/h) before the light  
will turn OFF.  
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in  
use. Repair the damaged road  
wheel/tire and reinstall it on  
the vehicle to restore system  
functionality. For a description  
on how the system functions,  
refer to When your temporary  
spare tire is installed in this  
section.  
TPMS  
malfunction  
If your tires are properly  
inflated and your spare tire is  
not in use and the light  
remains ON, have the system  
inspected by your authorized  
dealer.  
133  
PAGE: 133 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 134 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required  
Warning Light  
Flashing Warning  
Light  
Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in  
use. Repair the damaged road  
wheel and re-mount it on the  
vehicle to restore system  
functionality. For a description  
of how the system functions  
under these conditions, refer to  
When your temporary spare  
tire is intalled in this section.  
TPMS  
malfunction  
If your tires are properly  
inflated and your spare tire is  
not in use and the TPMS  
warning light is still ON, have  
the system inspected by your  
authorized dealer.  
When inflating your tires  
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your  
garage), the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond  
immediately to the air added to your tires.  
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the  
light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended  
tire pressure.  
How temperature affects your tire pressure  
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors tire pressure in  
each pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical  
passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi  
(14 to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary  
over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the  
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi  
(20.7 kPa) for a drop of 30° F (16.6° C) in ambient temperature. This  
lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being lower than  
the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for  
low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is ON, visually  
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more tires are flat,  
repair as necessary. Check air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is  
134  
PAGE: 134 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 135 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
underinflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where  
air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the recommended  
inflation pressure.  
CIMS #684807  
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS  
com_snow_tires_chains.mbs  
itdseq=164  
WARNING: Driving too fast for conditions creates the  
possibility of loss of vehicle control. Driving at very high speeds  
for extended periods of time may result in damage to vehicle  
components.  
NOTE: Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you  
currently have on your vehicle.  
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in  
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow  
tires and chains. If you need to use snow tires and chains, it is  
recommended that steel wheels are used of the same size and  
specifications as those originally installed.  
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:  
• Do not use tire chains on aluminum wheels. Chains may chip the  
wheels.  
• Use only SAE Class S chains.  
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any  
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.  
Drive cautiously. Ensure you obtain the proper cables or chains  
for you vehicle. Test fit the cables or chains before using them in  
snow and/or ice. If you hear the cables or chains rub or bang  
against the vehicle, stop and retighten them. If this does not  
work, remove the cables or chains to prevent vehicle damage.  
Have the cables or chains fitted by a professional before  
proceeding.  
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.  
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use  
tire chains on dry roads.  
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle  
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when  
using snow tires and chains.  
CIMS #1355516  
com_load-label-def  
itdseq=165  
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER  
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or  
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating  
135  
PAGE: 135 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 136 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will  
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading  
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining  
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s  
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:  
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of  
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or  
optional equipment.  
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you  
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket  
equipment.  
136  
PAGE: 136 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 137 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
art=f23gf110_b  
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the  
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found  
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door  
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire  
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND  
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for  
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum  
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket  
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the  
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the  
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.  
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle  
can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is  
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle  
should carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of  
your vehicle, do not add more cargo, even if there is space  
available. Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can  
contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover.  
137  
PAGE: 137 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 138 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Example only:  
art=ecogf501_a  
art=ecogf500_a  
art=f23gf112_b  
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,  
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load  
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.  
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle  
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.  
138  
PAGE: 138 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 139 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These  
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label  
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The total  
load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.  
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in  
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your  
authorized dealer.  
art=f23gf113_b  
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +  
passengers.  
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight  
Rating) – is the maximum  
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.  
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION  
art=mazmc001_a  
DATE: XX/XX  
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG  
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL  
XXXXKG  
REAR GAWR:  
XXXXKG  
XXXXLB  
allowable weight of the fully loaded  
vehicle (including all options,  
equipment, passengers and cargo).  
The GVWR is shown on the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label located on the B-Pillar or  
the edge of the driver’s door.  
The GVW must never exceed the  
GVWR.  
WITH  
TIRES  
WITH  
TIRES  
RIMS  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
RIMS  
PSI COLD  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR  
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN  
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.  
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
TYPE: XXX  
XXXXX  
XXXXX  
EXT PNT:  
WB BRK INT TR TP/PS  
XXX XX  
XX  
RC: XX  
AXLE  
XX  
DSO:  
R
X
TR SPR  
XXXXX  
XXX  
X
X
XX  
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX  
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX  
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification  
Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard  
vehicle handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or  
structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of  
control and personal injury.  
139  
PAGE: 139 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 140 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
art=f23gf115_c  
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle  
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.  
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable  
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and  
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.  
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at  
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for  
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the  
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.  
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.  
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a  
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only  
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of  
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel  
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized  
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your  
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.  
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount  
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.  
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000  
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.  
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply  
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875  
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)  
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on  
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.  
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load  
carrying capacities than the originals because they may lower  
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires  
with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR  
and GAWR limitations.  
140  
PAGE: 140 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 141 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation  
could result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal  
injury.  
Steps for determining the correct load limit:  
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo  
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.  
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that  
will be riding in your vehicle.  
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from  
XXX kg or XXX lbs.  
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and  
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals  
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,  
the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.  
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) =  
295 kg.)  
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded  
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available  
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.  
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be  
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how  
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your  
vehicle.  
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available  
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:  
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load  
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and  
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh  
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -  
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have  
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and  
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x  
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.  
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and  
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up  
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio  
141  
PAGE: 141 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 142 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of  
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100  
lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to  
transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each weigh  
220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x  
100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough  
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the  
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -  
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240  
lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then the  
load calculation would be:  
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have  
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In  
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x 45  
kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.  
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your  
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross  
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance  
Certification Label found on the edge of the driver’s door.  
CIMS #954537  
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and  
utility-type vehicles  
com_loading-warnings.fly  
itdseq=166  
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation  
of this type of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle  
section in the Driving chapter of this Owner’s Guide.  
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than  
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and  
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a  
heavily loaded vehicle.  
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.  
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and  
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.  
CIMS #101936  
com_towing.title  
itdseq=167  
TRAILER TOWING  
CIMS #685186  
com_towing.bseries  
itdseq=168  
Your vehicle may tow a class I, II or III trailer provided the maximum  
trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer weight listed  
for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.  
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so  
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.  
142  
PAGE: 142 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 143 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,  
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these  
components carefully after any towing operation.  
4x2 w/manual transmission  
Engine Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
weight - lb. of trailer -  
Maximum  
frontal area  
(kg)  
ft2 (m2)  
Regular Cab  
2.3L  
All  
4,800 (2,177)  
1,580 (717)  
Equal to  
frontal area  
of vehicle  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
3.0L*  
3.0L*  
Dual  
3.73  
4.10  
6,000 (2,722)  
6,000 (2,722)  
2,660 (1,207)  
2,520 (1,143)  
Sport  
Cab Plus 4  
2.3L  
All  
4,800 (2,177)  
1,420 (644)  
Equal to  
frontal area  
of vehicle  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
3.0L*  
3.0L*  
3.73  
4.10  
6,000 (2,722)  
6,000 (2,722)  
2,480 (1,125)  
2,360 (1,070)  
Dual  
Sport  
4.0L  
4.0L Dual  
Sport  
All  
All  
7,000 (3,175)  
7,000 (3,175)  
3,400 (1,542)  
3,280 (1,488)  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300  
meters) elevation.  
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long  
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient  
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed  
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.  
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier  
in this chapter.  
143  
PAGE: 143 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 144 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4x2 w/manual transmission  
Engine Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
weight - lb. of trailer -  
Maximum  
frontal area  
(kg)  
ft2 (m2)  
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular  
vehicle, see Vehicle Loading earlier in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the  
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and  
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating  
(GCWR).  
4x4 w/manual transmission  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
weight - lb. of trailer -  
Maximum  
frontal area  
(kg)  
ft2 (m2)  
Regular Cab  
3.0L*  
4.0L  
All  
All  
6,000 (2,722) 2,340 (1,061)  
7,000 (3,175) 3,260 (1,479)  
Cab Plus 4  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
4.0L  
All  
7,000 (3,175) 3,100 (1,406)  
50 (4.64)  
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300  
meters) of elevation.  
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long  
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient  
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed  
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.  
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in  
this chapter.  
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see  
Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.  
144  
PAGE: 144 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 145 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4x4 w/manual transmission  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
weight - lb. of trailer -  
Maximum  
frontal area  
(kg)  
ft2 (m2)  
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the  
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and  
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating  
(GCWR).  
4x2 w/automatic transmission  
Engine Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
weight - lb. of trailer -  
Maximum  
frontal area  
(kg)  
ft2 (m2)  
Regular Cab  
2.3L  
All  
5,500 (2,495)  
2,260 (1,025)  
Equal to  
frontal area  
of vehicle  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
3.0L*  
3.0L*  
Dual  
3.73  
4.10  
6,000 (2,722)  
6,000 (2,722)  
2,620 (1,188)  
2,480 (1,125)  
Sport  
Cab Plus 4  
2.3L  
4.10  
5,500 (2,495)  
2,100 (953)  
Equal to  
frontal area  
of vehicle  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
3.0L*  
3.0L*  
3.73  
4.10  
6,000 (2,722)  
6,000 (2,722)  
2,420 (1,098)  
2,320 (1,052)  
Dual  
Sport  
4.0L  
4.0L Dual  
Sport  
All  
All  
9,500 (4,309)  
9,500 (4,309)  
5,860 (2,658)  
5,760 (2,612)  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
145  
PAGE: 145 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 146 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4x2 w/automatic transmission  
Engine Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
weight - lb. of trailer -  
Maximum  
frontal area  
(kg)  
ft2 (m2)  
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300  
meters) elevation.  
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long  
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient  
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed  
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.  
For definition of terms used in this table see Vehicle Loading earlier  
in this chapter.  
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your particular  
vehicle, see Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the  
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and  
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating  
(GCWR).  
4x4 w/automatic transmission  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
weight - lb. of trailer -  
Maximum  
frontal area  
(kg)  
ft2 (m2)  
Regular Cab  
3.0L*  
4.0L  
3.73  
All  
6,000 (2,722) 2,300 (1,043)  
9,500 (4,309) 5,720 (2,594)  
Cab Plus 4  
50 (4.64)  
50 (4.64)  
4.0L  
All  
9,500 (4,309) 5,600 (2,540)  
50 (4.64)  
For high altitude operation, reduce GCW by 2% per 1,000 ft. (300  
meters) of elevation.  
146  
PAGE: 146 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 147 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
4x4 w/automatic transmission  
Engine  
Rear axle  
ratio  
Maximum  
GCWR - lb.  
(kg)  
Maximum  
trailer  
weight - lb. of trailer -  
Maximum  
frontal area  
(kg)  
ft2 (m2)  
*When towing on roads with steep grades or moderate but long  
sustained grades (5 miles [8 km] or more), or when ambient  
temperatures exceed 100°F (37°C), vehicle speed should not exceed  
45 mph (72 km/h) in both cases.  
For definition of terms used in this table, see Vehicle loading earlier in  
this chapter.  
To determine maximum trailer weight designed for your vehicle, see  
Vehicle loading earlier in this chapter.  
Maximum trailer weight is shown. The combined weight of the  
completed towing vehicle (including hitch, passengers and cargo) and  
the loaded trailer must not exceed the Gross Combined Weight Rating  
(GCWR).  
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on  
the certification label.  
The certification label is found on the driver’s door latch pillar.  
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended  
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could  
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural  
damage, loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal  
injury.  
CIMS #53196  
Preparing to tow  
com_prep-and-hitches  
itdseq=169  
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is  
properly attached to your vehicle. See your authorized dealer or a  
reliable trailer dealer if you require assistance.  
CIMS #710091  
com_hitches.mbs  
itdseq=170  
Hitches  
For towing trailers up to 2,000 lb. (907 kg), use a weight carrying hitch  
and ball which uniformly distributes the trailer tongue loads through the  
underbody structure. Use a frame-mounted weight distributing hitch for  
trailers over 2,000 lb. (907 kg).  
147  
PAGE: 147 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 148 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
Do not install a single or multi-clamp type bumper hitch, or a hitch  
which attaches to the axle. Underbody mounted hitches are acceptable if  
they are installed properly. Follow the towing instructions of a reputable  
rental agency.  
Whenever a trailer hitch and hardware are removed, make sure all  
mounting holes in the underbody are properly sealed to prevent noxious  
gases or water from entering.  
CIMS #81316  
com_safety-chains  
itdseq=171  
Safety chains  
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers  
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the  
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.  
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency  
gives to you.  
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.  
CIMS #81317  
com_trailer-brakes  
itdseq=172  
Trailer brakes  
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are  
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s  
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal  
regulations.  
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system  
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not  
have enough braking power and your chances of having a  
collision greatly increase.  
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the  
GVWR not GCWR.  
CIMS #81318  
com_trailer-lamps  
itdseq=173  
Trailer lamps  
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running  
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your  
authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and  
equipment for hooking up trailer lamps.  
CIMS #710092  
Using a step bumper  
com_use-step-bumper.mbs  
itdseq=174  
The optional step bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and requires  
only a ball with a 3/4 inch (19 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a  
2,000 lb. (907 kg) trailer weight and 200 lb. (91 kg) tongue weight  
capability.  
148  
PAGE: 148 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 149 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
The rated capacities (as shown in this guide) for trailer towing with the  
factory bumper are only valid when the trailer hitch ball is installed  
directly into the ball hole in the bumper. Addition of bracketry to either  
lower the ball hitch position or extend the ball hitch rearward will  
significantly increase the loads on the bumper and its attachments. This  
can result in the failure of the bumper or the bumper attachments. Use  
of any type of hitch extensions should be considered abuse.  
CIMS #476432  
com_towconnect.ran  
itdseq=175  
Trailer tow connector  
The trailer tow connector is located  
under the rear bumper, on the  
driver’s side of the vehicle.  
art=ranmc721_a  
1
2
3
4
Refer to the following chart for information regarding the  
factory-equipped trailer tow connector:  
Trailer tow connector  
Color  
Function  
Comment  
1. Dark Green  
Trailer right-hand  
turn signal  
Circuit activated when brake  
pedal is depressed or when  
ignition is on and right-hand  
turn signal is applied.  
2. Yellow  
Trailer left-hand turn Circuit activated when brake  
signal  
pedal is depressed or when  
ignition is on and left-hand  
turn signal is applied.  
Relay controlled circuit  
activated when the park  
lamps/headlamps are on.  
Matching vehicle circuit  
returns to battery’s negative  
ground.  
3. Tan/White  
4. White  
Tail lamp  
Ground  
149  
PAGE: 149 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 150 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #1514926  
Driving while you tow  
com_drivin-while-you-tow.mbs  
itdseq=176  
When towing a trailer:  
• Keep your speed no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) during the first  
500 miles (800 km) of towing a trailer, and don’t make full throttle  
starts.  
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off  
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.  
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.  
• To eliminate excessive shifting, use a lower gear. This will also assist  
in transmission cooling. (For additional information, refer to the  
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission section in the  
Driving chapter.)  
• Under extreme conditions with large frontal trailers, high outside  
temperatures and highway speeds, the coolant gauge may indicate  
higher than normal coolant temperatures. If this occurs, reduce speed  
until the coolant temperature returns to the normal range. Refer to  
Engine coolant temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter.  
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.  
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.  
Servicing after towing  
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more  
frequent service intervals. Refer to your scheduled maintenance  
information for more information.  
CIMS #83488  
com_towing-tips.02  
itdseq=177  
Trailer towing tips  
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to  
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make  
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.  
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.  
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer  
weight.  
• If you will be towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly  
conditions, at GCWR, or any combination of these factors, consider  
refilling your rear axle with synthetic gear lube if not already so  
equipped. Refer to the Maintenance and specifications chapter for  
the lubricant specification. Remember that regardless of the rear axle  
150  
PAGE: 150 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 151 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
lube used, do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of a  
new vehicle, and that the first 500 miles (800 km) of towing be done  
at no faster than 70 mph (112 km/h) with no full throttle starts.  
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your  
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.  
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot  
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park)  
(automatic transmission) or N (Neutral) (manual transmissions).  
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must  
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.  
CIMS #81391  
Launching or retrieving a boat  
com_launch-retrieving_boat.1  
itdseq=178  
Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer  
into the water. Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the  
trailer is removed from the water.  
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:  
• do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of  
the rear bumper.  
• do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the  
bottom edge of the rear bumper.  
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:  
• causing internal damage to the components.  
• affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.  
Replace the rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in  
water. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or changed  
unless a leak is suspected or repair required.  
CIMS #555656  
RECREATIONAL TOWING  
com_recreational-towing.ran  
itdseq=179  
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational towing. An  
example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a  
motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your  
transmission is not damaged.  
Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:  
Note: 4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission follow these  
guidelines for recreational towing:  
Before you have your vehicle towed:  
• Release the parking brake.  
151  
PAGE: 151 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 152 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
• Move the gearshift to the neutral position.  
• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.  
• The maximum recommended speed is 55 mph (88 km/h).  
• The maximum recommended distance is unlimited.  
• Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)  
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no  
damage is done to the internal transmission components.  
For 4x4 vehicles with a manual transmission, it is recommended that a  
Neutral Tow Kit be purchased and installed by an authorized dealer if  
the vehicle is towed frequently.  
In addition, it is recommended that you follow the instructions  
provided by the aftermarket manufacturer of the towing  
apparatus if one has been installed.  
Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission  
4x2 and 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission follow these  
guidelines for recreational towing:  
• Release the parking brake.  
• Turn the key in the ignition to the OFF/UNLOCKED position.  
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral).  
• Do not exceed a distance of 50 miles (80 km).  
• Do not exceed 35 mph (56 km/h) vehicle speed.  
• Put 4x4 switch in 2WD mode (4x4 only)  
• The vehicle must be towed in the forward position to ensure no  
damage is done to the internal transfer case components.  
For 4x4 vehicles with an automatic transmission, a Neutral Tow Kit must  
be purchased and installed by an authorized dealer if a distance of 50  
miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded.  
For 4x2 vehicles with an automatic transmission, if a distance of 50 miles  
(80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) must be exceeded, you must  
disconnect the rear driveshaft. It is recommended that the driveshaft be  
removed/installed only by an authorized dealer. See your authorized  
dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.  
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause  
transmission fluid or transfer case fluid loss, damage to the  
driveshaft and internal transmission and transfer case  
components.  
152  
PAGE: 152 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 153 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Tires, Wheels and Loading  
CIMS #695136  
CAMPER BODIES  
com_no-camper.bseries  
itdseq=180  
Your pickup is not recommended for slide–in camper bodies.  
153  
PAGE: 153 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 154 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
CIMS #727778  
com_starting-title  
itdseq=181  
STARTING  
CIMS #77457  
Positions of the ignition  
com_ignition_positions.04  
itdseq=182  
1. ACCESSORY, allows the  
electrical accessories such as  
art=exdto300_a  
4
the radio to operate while the  
engine is not running.  
3
5
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel,  
automatic transmission gearshift  
lever and allows key removal.  
2
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and  
all accessories without locking  
the steering wheel. This position  
1
also allows the automatic transmission shift lever to be moved from  
the P (Park) position without the brake pedal being depressed.  
WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF  
position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved  
from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.  
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking  
brake.  
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key  
position when driving.  
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine  
starts.  
CIMS #1129631  
Preparing to start your vehicle  
com_starting-vehicle.mbs  
itdseq=183  
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system.  
Note: This system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment  
standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of  
radio noise.  
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before  
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty  
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to  
Starting the engine in this chapter.  
154  
PAGE: 154 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 155 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce  
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,  
creating the risk of fire or other damage.  
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass  
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the  
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in  
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open  
the garage door before you start the engine. See Guarding  
against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions.  
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,  
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive  
if you smell exhaust fumes.  
CIMS #684692  
Important safety precautions  
com_imp-precautions.mbs  
itdseq=184  
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If  
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle  
checked.  
Before starting the vehicle:  
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more  
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the  
Seating and Safety Restraints chapter.  
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.  
If starting a vehicle with an automatic transmission:  
155  
PAGE: 155 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 156 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
• Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
art=unogf300_h  
• Make sure the gearshift is in P  
(Park).  
art=rangf120_a  
art=ctogf111_a  
If starting a vehicle with a manual  
transmission:  
1. Make sure the parking brake is  
set.  
2. Push the clutch pedal to the  
floor.  
3. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without  
turning the key to 5 (START).  
art=exdto300_a  
4
3
5
2
1
If there is difficulty in turning the key, firmly rotate the steering wheel  
left and right until the key turns freely. This condition may occur when:  
• front wheels are turned  
• front wheel is against the curb  
• steering wheel is turned when getting in or out of the vehicle  
156  
PAGE: 156 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 157 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
Some warning lights will briefly illuminate. See Warning lights and  
chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information  
regarding the warning lights.  
CIMS #1129632  
com_start.mbs  
Starting the engine  
itdseq=185  
Note: Whenever you start your vehicle, release the key as soon as the  
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.  
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without  
turning the key to 5 (START). If  
art=f12st004_b  
4
there is difficulty in turning the  
3
key, rotate the steering wheel  
until the key turns freely. This  
condition may occur when:  
5
2
• the front wheels are turned  
• a front wheel is against the curb  
1
Turn the key to 5 (START), then  
release the key as soon as the  
engine starts. Excessive cranking could damage the starter.  
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,  
turn the key to OFF, wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still  
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will  
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is  
flooded with fuel.  
CIMS #954491  
Guarding against exhaust fumes  
com_guarding-fumes.fly  
itdseq=186  
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid  
its dangerous effects.  
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,  
have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive  
if you smell exhaust fumes.  
CIMS #954493  
com_ventilation.fly  
itdseq=187  
Important ventilating information  
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of  
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating  
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.  
CIMS #954489  
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)  
com_engine-block-heater.fly  
itdseq=188  
An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting  
and heater/defroster performance. Use of an engine block heater is  
157  
PAGE: 157 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 158 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
strongly recommended if you live in a region where temperatures reach  
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best results, plug the heater in at least three  
hours before starting the vehicle. The heater can be plugged in the night  
before starting the vehicle.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use  
your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged  
(cheater) adapters.  
CIMS #954495  
com_brake_info.fly  
itdseq=189  
BRAKES  
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding  
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out  
and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If the vehicle has  
continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking, the  
vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.  
Refer to Brake system warning  
!
P
light in the Instrument Cluster  
chapter for information on the brake  
system warning light.  
art=dnogf004_a  
BRAKE  
CIMS #713206  
com_abs_info.mbs  
itdseq=190  
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
This vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock braking system (ABS), a noise  
from the hydraulic pump motor and pulsation in the pedal may be  
observed during ABS braking events. Pedal pulsation coupled with noise  
while braking under panic conditions or on loose gravel, bumps, wet or  
snowy roads is normal and indicates proper functioning of the vehicle’s  
anti-lock brake system.  
NOTE: The ABS performs a self-check after you start the engine and  
begin to drive away.  
A brief mechanical noise may be heard during this test. This is normal. If  
a malfunction is found, the ABS warning light will come on. If the vehicle  
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,  
the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer.  
158  
PAGE: 158 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 159 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
The ABS operates by detecting the  
onset of wheel lockup during brake  
applications and compensates for  
this tendency. The wheels are  
art=comss004_a  
prevented from locking even when  
the brakes are firmly applied. The  
accompanying illustration depicts  
the advantage of an ABS equipped  
vehicle (on bottom) to a non-ABS  
equipped vehicle (on top) during hard braking with loss of front braking  
traction.  
WARNING: The Anti-Lock system does not decrease the time  
necessary to apply the brakes or always reduce stopping  
distance. Always leave enough room between your vehicle and  
the vehicle in front of you to stop.  
CIMS #954499  
com_abs_use.fly  
itdseq=191  
Using ABS  
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake  
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the  
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping  
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain  
steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces. However,  
the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.  
CIMS #954498  
com_abs_warn.fly  
itdseq=192  
ABS warning lamp  
The ABS lamp in the instrument  
cluster momentarily illuminates  
art=dnogf001_a  
ABS  
when the ignition is turned on. If  
the light does not illuminate during  
start up, remains on or flashes, the  
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.  
Even when the ABS is disabled,  
normal braking is still effective. (If  
your BRAKE warning lamp  
illuminates with the parking brake  
released, have your brake system  
serviced immediately by an authorized dealer.)  
!
P
art=dnogf004_a  
BRAKE  
159  
PAGE: 159 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 160 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
CIMS #684693  
com_park_brake.mbs  
itdseq=193  
Parking brake  
Apply the parking brake whenever  
the vehicle is parked. To set the  
parking brake, press the parking  
brake pedal down until the pedal  
stops.  
art=unogf300_h  
The BRAKE warning lamp in the  
!
P
instrument cluster illuminates and  
remains illuminated (when the  
ignition is turned ON) until the  
parking brake is released.  
art=dnogf004_a  
BRAKE  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
that the gearshift is securely latched in P (Park) (automatic  
transmission) or in 1 (First) (manual transmission).  
NOTE: The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle.  
However, if the normal brakes fail, the parking brake can be used to stop  
your vehicle in an emergency. Since the parking brake applies only the  
rear brakes, the vehicle’s stopping distance will increase greatly and the  
handling of your vehicle will be adversely affected.  
Pull the release lever to release the  
brake.  
art=expgf303_b  
Driving with the parking brake  
on will cause the brakes to wear  
out quickly and reduce fuel  
economy.  
160  
PAGE: 160 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 161 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
CIMS #244756  
com_steering.04  
itdseq=194  
STEERING  
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy  
from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.  
To help prevent damage to the power steering pump:  
• Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left  
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.  
• Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level  
below the MIN mark on the reservoir.  
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check  
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your  
authorized dealer.  
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering  
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before  
seeking service by your authorized dealer.  
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on  
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.  
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned  
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.  
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:  
• Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)  
• Uneven vehicle loading  
• High crown in center of road  
• High crosswinds  
• Wheels out of alignment  
• Loose or worn suspension components  
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)  
CIMS #954505  
com_axle-statement.fly  
itdseq=195  
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when  
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the  
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may  
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.  
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.  
CIMS #954507  
com_prep-to-drive.fly  
itdseq=196  
PREPARING TO DRIVE  
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover  
rate than other types of vehicles.  
161  
PAGE: 161 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 162 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is  
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat  
belt.  
Utility vehicles and trucks have larger tires and increased ground  
clearance, giving the vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger  
car.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility vehicles and trucks handle differently than vehicles with  
a lower center of gravity. Utility vehicles and trucks are not  
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any  
more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform  
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns,  
excessive speed or abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure  
to drive cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of  
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.  
WARNING: Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity,  
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Do not overload  
your vehicle and use extra precautions, such as driving at  
slower speeds, avoiding abrupt steering changes and allowing  
for increased stopping distance, when driving a heavily loaded  
vehicle. Over loading or loading the vehicle improperly can  
deteriorate handling capability and contribute to loss of vehicle  
control and vehicle rollover.  
CIMS #197246  
com_auto-trans.ie  
itdseq=197  
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
Brake-shift interlock  
CIMS #1124643 com_bsi.mbs  
itdseq=198  
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents  
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is  
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.  
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in  
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:  
162  
PAGE: 162 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 163 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
1. Apply the parking brake, turn  
ignition key to LOCK, then  
remove the key.  
art=mbsto300_a  
2. Insert the key and turn it to  
OFF. Apply the brake pedal  
and shift to N (Neutral).  
WARNING: When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF  
position, the automatic transmission shift lever can be moved  
from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal depressed.  
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always set the parking  
brake.  
3. Start the vehicle.  
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,  
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not  
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside  
Emergencies chapter.  
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the  
brakelamps are working.  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the  
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your  
vehicle.  
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake  
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be  
working properly. See your authorized dealer.  
CIMS #1129633  
com_5r55e.mbs  
itdseq=199  
Driving with a 5–speed automatic transmission (if equipped)  
art=rangf120_a  
163  
PAGE: 163 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 164 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.  
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and  
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any  
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal  
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations  
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive  
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating  
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission  
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer  
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift  
scheduling will resume.  
WARNING: Hold the brake pedal down while you move the  
gearshift lever from P (Park) to another position. If you do not  
hold the brake pedal down, your vehicle may move unexpectedly  
and injure someone.  
P (Park)  
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from  
turning.  
To put your vehicle in gear:  
• Start the engine  
• Depress the brake pedal  
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear  
To put your vehicle in P (Park):  
• Come to a complete stop  
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)  
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure  
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the  
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your  
vehicle.  
R (Reverse)  
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.  
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R  
(Reverse).  
164  
PAGE: 164 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 165 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
N (Neutral)  
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is  
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.  
(Overdrive)  
The normal driving position for the  
best fuel economy. Transmission  
art=rangf110_a  
art=expis024_a  
O/D  
ON/OFF  
operates in gears one through  
five.  
(Overdrive) can be  
deactivated by pressing the  
transmission control switch on the end of the gearshift lever.  
This will illuminate the O/D OFF  
lamp and activate Drive.  
O/D  
OFF  
Drive (not shown)  
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.  
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.  
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.  
• Provides engine braking.  
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to  
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer  
towing and when engine braking is required.  
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control  
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.  
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned  
off.  
2 (Second)  
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional  
engine braking on downgrades.  
1 (First)  
• Provides maximum engine braking.  
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.  
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)  
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.  
Forced downshifts  
• Allowed in  
(Overdrive) or Drive.  
165  
PAGE: 165 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 166 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.  
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.  
MANUAL TRANSMISSION OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
CIMS #72083  
itdseq=200  
com_manual  
art=ctogf101_b  
1
2
3
4
5
R
CIMS #72084  
Using the clutch  
com_using_clutch.rwd  
itdseq=201  
The manual transmission has a starter interlock that prevents cranking  
the engine unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed.  
To start the vehicle:  
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully set.  
2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, then put the gearshift lever in the  
neutral position.  
3. Start the engine.  
4. Press the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever to the desired  
gear; 1 (First) or R (Reverse).  
5. Release the parking brake, then slowly release the clutch pedal while  
slowly pressing on the accelerator.  
During each shift, the clutch pedal must be fully depressed to the floor.  
Make sure the floor mat is properly positioned so it doesn’t interfere with  
the full extension of the clutch pedal.  
Failure to fully depress the clutch pedal to the floor may cause  
increased shift efforts, prematurely wear transmission  
components or damage the transmission.  
Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or use the  
clutch pedal to hold your vehicle at a standstill while waiting on a  
hill. These actions will reduce the life of the clutch.  
CIMS #1124644  
com_shift-speeds.mbs  
itdseq=202  
Recommended shift speeds  
Downshift according to the following charts for your specific  
engine/drivetrain combination:  
166  
PAGE: 166 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 167 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
Upshifts  
Transfer case position (if equipped)  
Shift from:  
2WD and 4H  
4L  
1 -2  
2 - 3  
10 mph (16 km/h)  
19 mph (26 km/h)  
4 mph (6 km/h)  
8 mph (10 km/h)  
3 - 4  
4 - 5 (Overdrive)  
28 mph (43 km/h) 12 mph (16 km/h)  
40 mph (68 km/h) 16 mph (26 km/h)  
Maximum downshift speeds  
Transfer case position (if equipped)  
2WD and 4H 4L  
Shift from:  
5 (Overdrive) - 4  
55 mph (88 km/h) 22 mph (34 km/h)  
45 mph (72 km/h) 18 mph (27 km/h)  
35 mph (56 km/h) 14 mph (21 km/h)  
4 - 3  
3 - 2  
2 - 1  
20 mph (32 km/h)  
8 mph (11 km/h)  
CIMS #1035364  
com_reverse.uno  
itdseq=203  
Reverse  
1. Make sure that your vehicle is at a complete stop before you shift  
into R (Reverse). Failure to do so may damage the transmission.  
2. Move the gearshift lever into the neutral position and wait at least  
three seconds before shifting into R (Reverse).  
• The gearshift lever can only be moved into R (Reverse) by moving it  
from left of 3 (Third) and 4 (Fourth) before shifting into R (Reverse).  
This is a lockout feature that protects the transmission from  
accidentally being shifted into R (Reverse) from 5 (Overdrive).  
CIMS #72086  
com_parking.rwd  
itdseq=204  
Parking your vehicle  
1. Apply the brake and shift into the neutral position.  
2. Fully apply the parking brake, then shift into 1 (First).  
3. Turn the ignition off.  
WARNING: Do not park your vehicle in Neutral, it may move  
unexpectedly and injure someone. Use 1 (First) gear and set  
the parking brake fully.  
167  
PAGE: 167 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 168 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
CIMS #1035362  
com_remove-key  
itdseq=205  
Removing the key  
Turn the ignition off, push the  
release lever (located above the  
ignition), then turn the key toward  
you and remove the key.  
art=rangf114_a  
CIMS #1058177  
com_rocking-vehicle  
itdseq=206  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow  
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by  
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a  
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the  
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.  
CIMS #73625  
itdseq=207  
com_four_wd  
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)  
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation  
of this type of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in  
this chapter.  
Four–wheel drive (4WD) supplies power to all four wheels. 4WD should  
not be operated on dry pavement; driveline damage may occur.  
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low  
is selected while the vehicle is moving above 3 mph (5 km/h), the  
4WD system will not engage. This is normal and should be no  
reason for concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4WD Low for proper  
operation.  
CIMS #1114726  
com_4wd-lights.ran2003  
itdseq=208  
4WD system indicator lights  
• 4x4 - Momentarily illuminates  
4x4  
when the vehicle is started.  
art=f12ip031_a  
Illuminates when 4H (4WD High)  
is engaged.  
168  
PAGE: 168 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 169 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
• 4x4 LOW – Momentarily  
4x4  
illuminates when the vehicle is  
art=expis340_a  
LOW  
started. Illuminates when 4L  
(4WD Low) is engaged.  
CIMS #1114746  
Using the electronic shift 4WD system  
com_electronic-4wd.ran2003  
itdseq=209  
4H  
2H  
art=f12gf104_c  
4L  
2H (2WD High) - Power to the rear wheels only; used for street and  
highway driving.  
4H (4WD High) - Used for extra traction such as in snow or icy roads  
or in off-road situations. Not intended for use on dry pavement.  
4L (4WD Low) - Uses extra gearing to provide maximum power to all  
four wheels. Intended only for off-road applications such as deep sand,  
steep grades or pulling heavy objects. 4L (4WD Low) will not engage  
while the vehicle is moving; this is normal and should be no reason for  
concern. Refer to Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low) for proper operation.  
Shifting between 2H (2WD High) and 4H (4WD High)  
• Move the 4WD control between 2H and 4H at a stop or any forward  
speed.  
Note: Do not perform this operation if the rear wheels are slipping.  
Shifting to/from 4L (4WD Low)  
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.  
This is normal and should be no reason for concern.  
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop  
2. Depress the brake  
3. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, place the  
transmission in N (Neutral); on vehicles equipped with a manual  
transmission, depress the clutch.  
4. Move the 4WD control to the desired position.  
169  
PAGE: 169 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 170 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
• If shifting into 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4WD LOW light in the  
instrument cluster to turn on indicating the shift is complete.  
• If shifting out of 4L (4WD Low), wait for the 4WD LOW light in the  
instrument cluster to turn off indicating the shift is complete.  
CIMS #83537  
Driving off-road with 4WD  
com_driving-offroad.02  
itdseq=210  
Your vehicle is specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and  
rough terrain and has operating characteristics that are somewhat  
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.  
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles  
Trucks and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your  
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without  
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.  
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle  
differently than an ordinary passenger car.  
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.  
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel  
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not  
grip the spokes.  
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as  
rocks and stumps.  
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before  
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain  
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four  
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.  
Basic operating principles  
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce  
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.  
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose  
surfaces.  
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering  
characteristics of your vehicle.  
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by  
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.  
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement  
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but  
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the  
170  
PAGE: 170 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 171 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering  
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.  
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow  
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose  
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too  
sharply or abruptly.  
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway  
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a  
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide  
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the  
safety of others should be your primary concern.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than  
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel  
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high  
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are  
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.  
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in  
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death.  
If your vehicle gets stuck  
If the vehicle is stuck it may be rocked out by shifting from forward and  
reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press lightly  
on the accelerator in each gear.  
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating  
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.  
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage  
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may  
overheat.  
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).  
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.  
Emergency maneuvers  
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn  
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,  
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid  
171  
PAGE: 171 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 172 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,  
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or  
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are  
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could  
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover  
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the  
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.  
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not  
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.  
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as  
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than  
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel  
drive vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high  
as passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are  
designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions.  
Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in  
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,  
personal injury and death.  
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from  
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle  
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,  
avoid these abrupt inputs.  
Sand  
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid  
area of the trail. Do not reduce the tire pressures but shift to a lower  
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly  
and avoid spinning the wheels.  
Mud and water  
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake  
capability may be limited.  
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher  
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the  
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.  
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the  
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving  
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
172  
PAGE: 172 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 173 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to the driveshafts and  
tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an  
imbalance that could damage drive components.  
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,  
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.  
Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is  
submerged may allow water into the transmission and cause  
internal transmission damage.  
Replace rear axle lubricant any time the axle has been submerged in  
water. The rear axle does not normally require a lubricant change for the  
life of the vehicle. Rear axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked or  
changed unless a leak is suspected or repair is required.  
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain  
When driving on a hill, avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep  
slopes. You could lose traction and slip sideways. Drive straight up,  
straight down or avoid the hill completely. Know the conditions on the  
other side of a hill before driving over the crest.  
When climbing a steep hill, start in a lower gear rather than downshifting  
to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started. This  
reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.  
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden braking. Shift to a lower gear  
when added engine braking is desired.  
When speed control is on and you are driving uphill, your vehicle speed  
may drop considerably, especially if you are carrying a heavy load.  
If vehicle speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h), the speed control  
will cancel automatically. Resume speed with accelerator pedal.  
If speed control cancels after climbing the hill, reset speed by pressing  
and holding the SET ACCEL button (to resume speeds over 30 mph [50  
km/h]).  
Automatic transmissions may shift frequently while driving up steep  
grades. Eliminate frequent shifting by shifting out of  
a lower gear.  
(Overdrive) into  
Driving on snow and ice  
A 4WD vehicle has advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but  
can skid like any other vehicle.  
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on  
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting  
from a full stop.  
173  
PAGE: 173 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 174 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Driving  
When braking, apply the brakes as you normally would. In order to allow  
the anti-lock brake system (ABS) to operate properly, keep steady  
pressure on the brake pedal.  
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles  
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower  
gears.  
CIMS #954533  
com_deep-water.fly  
itdseq=211  
DRIVING THROUGH WATER  
If driving through deep or standing  
water is unavoidable, proceed very  
slowly especially when the depth is  
not known. Never drive through  
water that is higher than the bottom  
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the  
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).  
art=taumc713_b  
When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited.  
Also, water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your  
engine or your vehicle may stall. Driving through deep water where  
the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water into the  
transmission and cause internal transmission damage.  
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your  
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.  
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.  
174  
PAGE: 174 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 175 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #  
com_hazard-flasher-info  
itdseq=212  
HAZARD FLASHER  
The hazard flasher is located on the  
steering column, just behind the  
steering wheel. The hazard flashers  
will operate when the ignition is in  
any position or if the key is not in  
the ignition.  
art=rancf500_a  
Push in the flasher control and all  
front and rear direction signals will  
flash. Press the flasher control again  
to turn them off. Use it when your  
vehicle is disabled and is creating a  
safety hazard for other motorists.  
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.  
CIMS #1296506  
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH  
com_fuel-pump-shutoff.ran  
itdseq=213  
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine  
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.  
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch  
may have been activated.  
175  
PAGE: 175 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 176 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
The fuel pump shut-off switch is  
located under the right-hand side of  
the glove box, just above the carpet.  
art=raner102_c  
To reset the switch:  
1. Turn the ignition OFF.  
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.  
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset  
the switch by pushing in on the  
reset button.  
4. Turn the ignition ON.  
5. Wait a few seconds and return  
the key to OFF.  
6. Make another check for leaks.  
CIMS #55291  
FUSES AND RELAYS  
Fuses  
com_fuses-relays.01  
itdseq=214  
CIMS #55297  
itdseq=215  
com_fuse.01  
If electrical components in the  
vehicle are not working, a fuse may  
have blown. Blown fuses are  
art=dnoer001_c  
identified by a broken wire within  
15  
the fuse. Check the appropriate  
fuses before replacing any electrical  
components.  
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage  
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire  
damage and could start a fire.  
176  
PAGE: 176 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 177 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #55301  
Standard fuse amperage rating and color  
com_fuse_amp_rating.01  
itdseq=216  
COLOR  
Cartridge  
Fuse  
rating  
Mini  
fuses  
Standard  
fuses  
Maxi  
fuses  
Fuse link  
cartridge  
maxi  
fuses  
—
—
—
2A  
3A  
4A  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
Grey  
Violet  
Pink  
Tan  
—
—
—
—
—
—
5A  
—
—
—
7.5A  
10A  
15A  
20A  
25A  
30A  
40A  
50A  
60A  
70A  
80A  
Brown  
Red  
Brown  
Red  
—
—
—
Yellow  
—
Green  
Orange  
Red  
Blue  
Tan  
Natural  
—
—
—
Blue  
—
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
—
—
—
—
Blue  
—
Pink  
Green  
Red  
Yellow  
Brown  
Black  
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
—
Blue  
Yellow  
Natural  
Green  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Black  
CIMS #1252347  
com_passenger-title.ran  
itdseq=217  
Passenger compartment fuse panel  
The fuse panel is located under the  
right-hand side of the instrument  
panel behind the kick panel. A fuse  
puller tool is located near the top  
left corner of the fuse box; this tool  
will assist you in pulling the fuses  
out for inspection, if necessary.  
art=raner523_a  
177  
PAGE: 177 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 178 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #683868  
com_passenger-mbs  
itdseq=218  
art=raner505_c  
The fuses are coded as follows:  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
5A  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Instrument panel dimmer switch  
Trailer tow park lamps  
Right low beam headlamp  
Left low beam headlamp  
Windshield wipers/washer  
Radio (RUN/ACCY)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10A  
10A  
10A  
30A  
10A  
5A  
10A  
Not used (spare)  
Restraints Control Module (RCM),  
PADI (Passenger Air bag  
Deactivation Indicator), Occupant  
Classification Sensor (OCS)  
Cluster air bag indicator  
9
5A  
178  
PAGE: 178 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 179 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
10  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
10A  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Cluster (RUN/START), 4x4  
module (RUN/START)  
Smart Junction Box (SJB) (Logic  
power)  
11  
12  
10A  
15A  
Audiophile subwoofer amplifier,  
Satellite radio  
13  
14  
15A  
15A  
Horn, Interior lamps  
High beam headlamp, High beam  
indicator (cluster)  
15  
16  
—
One-touch down relay  
30A cartridge Power windows  
fuse  
17  
18  
19  
15A  
—
20A  
Turn signals/Hazards  
Not used  
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp  
(CHMSL)/Stop lamps  
20  
10A  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)  
module, Brake-shift interlock,  
Speed control module, Back-up  
lamps, Overdrive cancel switch,  
Electronic flasher (turn/hazard)  
Starter relay coil  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
5A  
5A  
30A  
20A  
—
Radio (START)  
Headlamps (low and high beam)  
Radio battery feed (B+)  
Accessory relay  
Redundant cruise switch  
Climate control blower relay/blend  
doors  
2A  
10A  
28  
29  
15A  
20A  
4x4 module battery feed (B+)  
Cigar lighter, Diagnostic connector  
(OBD II)  
179  
PAGE: 179 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 180 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
5A  
Passenger Compartment Fuse  
Panel Description  
Power mirrors  
Front park lamps, Rear park  
lamps, License plate lamps,  
Dimmer switch, Trailer tow park  
lamps  
30  
31  
20A  
32  
33  
5A  
5A  
Brake switch (logic)  
Instrument cluster battery feed  
(B+)  
34  
35  
20A  
15A  
Power point  
Power locks  
CIMS #1273111  
Power distribution box  
com_power-dist-title.mbs  
itdseq=219  
The power distribution box is  
located in the engine compartment.  
The power distribution box contains  
high-current fuses that protect your  
vehicle’s main electrical systems  
from overloads.  
art=raner500_b  
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing  
fuses.  
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace  
the cover to the Power Distribution Box before reconnecting  
the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.  
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the  
Battery section of the Maintenance and specifications chapter.  
180  
PAGE: 180 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 181 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #708397  
2.3L engine (if equipped)  
com_power-box-mbs.23l  
itdseq=220  
art=raner512_b  
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
1
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Passenger compartment fuse  
40A**  
panel  
2
3
—
40A**  
Not used  
Passenger compartment fuse  
panel  
4
5
—
50A**  
Not used  
Passenger compartment fuse  
panel  
6
7
8
—
40A**  
—
Not used  
Starter solenoid  
Not used  
9
10  
11  
40A**  
—
30A**  
Ignition switch  
Not used  
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)  
relay  
181  
PAGE: 181 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 182 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
—
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Not used  
Blower motor (climate control)  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)  
module  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
30A**  
—
—
—
40A**  
18  
19  
20  
21  
—
20A**  
—
Not used  
Engine fan  
Not used  
10A*  
PCM keep alive power, Canister  
purge valve solenoid  
Not used  
Fuel pump motor, Fuel injectors  
Not used  
A/C clutch solenoid  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
—
30A*  
—
10A*  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
30A*  
Not used  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)  
module  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
—
—
—
—
7.5A*  
15A*  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Trailer tow (right turn)  
PCM power  
182  
PAGE: 182 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 183 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
—
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Not used  
40  
41  
42  
43  
10A*  
7.5A*  
20A*  
Automatic transmission  
Trailer tow (left turn)  
Engine fan relay coil, A/C relay,  
Engine sensors, VMV solenoid  
Ignition coil, Capacitor  
Wiper HI/LO relay  
Wiper Park/Run relay  
Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors  
relay  
44  
15A*  
—
—
45A  
45B  
46A  
—
46B  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Washer pump relay  
Engine fan relay  
Starter relay  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
PCM relay  
55  
56A  
56B  
Blower relay  
A/C clutch solenoid relay  
Not used  
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses  
183  
PAGE: 183 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 184 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #683869  
com_power-box-mbs  
itdseq=221  
3.0L and 4.0L engines (if equipped)  
art=raner514_d  
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
1
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Passenger compartment fuse  
panel  
40A**  
2
3
—
40A**  
Not used  
Passenger compartment fuse  
panel  
4
5
—
50A**  
Not used  
Passenger compartment fuse  
panel  
6
7
8
—
40A**  
—
Not used  
Starter solenoid  
Not used  
9
10  
11  
40A**  
—
30A**  
Ignition switch  
Not used  
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)  
relay fuse  
184  
PAGE: 184 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 185 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
—
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Not used  
Blower motor (climate control)  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)  
module  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
30A**  
—
—
—
40A**  
18  
19  
20  
21  
—
—
—
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
10A*  
PCM keep alive power, Canister  
purge valve solenoid  
Not used  
Fuel pump motor, Fuel injectors  
Not used  
A/C clutch solenoid  
Not used  
4x4 module  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Foglamps  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
—
30A*  
—
10A*  
—
20A*  
—
—
—
15A*  
—
Not used  
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)  
module  
30A*  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
—
—
—
—
7.5A*  
15A*  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Trailer tow (right turn)  
PCM power  
185  
PAGE: 185 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 186 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
Fuse/Relay  
Location  
Fuse Amp  
Rating  
—
Power Distribution Box  
Description  
Not used  
Automatic transmission  
Trailer tow (left turn)  
A/C relay coil, Engine sensors,  
VMV solenoid, EGR solenoid,  
Heated PCV  
40  
41  
42  
43  
10A*  
7.5A*  
20A*  
44  
15A*  
—
—
—
—
Ignition coil, Capacitor  
Wiper HI/LO relay  
Wiper Park/Run relay  
A/C clutch solenoid  
Washer pump relay  
PCM relay  
45A  
45B  
46A  
46B  
47  
—
48A  
—
Fuel pump relay, Fuel injectors  
relay  
48B  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Fog lamp relay  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Blower relay  
Starter relay  
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses  
CIMS #766082  
com_change_tires.152  
itdseq=222  
CHANGING THE TIRES  
If you get a flat tire while driving:  
• do not brake heavily.  
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.  
• hold the steering wheel firmly.  
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.  
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will  
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of  
the monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure  
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.  
186  
PAGE: 186 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 187 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage  
to the TPMS sensor, refer to Changing tires with TPMS in the Tires,  
Wheels and Loading chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as  
soon as possible.  
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tires. The  
use of tire sealants may also damage your Tire Pressure  
Monitoring System and should not be used.  
WARNING: Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
in the Tires, Wheels and Loading chapter for important  
information. If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes  
damaged, it will no longer function.  
CIMS #1348491  
com_dissimilar-tires  
itdseq=223  
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information  
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an  
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.  
If you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for  
temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should  
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size  
and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by  
Mazda. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be  
replaced rather than repaired.  
A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that  
is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels  
and can be one of three types:  
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter “T” for tire  
size and may have “Temporary Use Only” molded in the sidewall  
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire  
has a label on the wheel that states: “THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR  
TEMPORARY USE ONLY”  
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:  
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)  
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the  
Safety Compliance Label  
• Tow a trailer  
187  
PAGE: 187 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 188 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire  
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time  
• Use commercial car washing equipment  
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire  
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel  
location can lead to impairment of the following:  
• Handling, stability and braking performance  
• Comfort and noise  
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
• Winter weather driving capability  
• Wet weather driving capability  
For vehicles equipped with 4WD, it is not recommended that the vehicle  
be operated in 4WD modes with a temporary emergency spare tire. If  
4WD operation is necessary, do not operate above speeds of 10 mph (16  
km/h) or for distances above 50 miles (80 km).  
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel  
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:  
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)  
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time  
• Use commercial car washing equipment  
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare  
tire/wheel  
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to  
impairment of the following:  
• Handling, stability and braking performance  
• Comfort and noise  
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs  
• Winter weather driving capability  
• Wet weather driving capability  
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)  
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)  
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional  
caution should be given to:  
188  
PAGE: 188 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 189 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
• Towing a trailer  
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body  
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack  
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire/wheel and  
seek service as soon as possible.  
CIMS #1516741  
com_full-size-spare  
itdseq=224  
Full-size Matching Spare Tire/Wheel Information  
This spare tire/wheel will match the road tire/wheel. When driving with  
the full size matching spare tire/wheel, do not exceed 70 mph (113  
km/h). It is intended for temporary use only. This means if you need to  
use it, you should replace it as soon as possible.  
CIMS #1125281  
com_spare-tire.mbs  
itdseq=225  
Location of the spare tire and tools  
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator light will  
illuminate when the spare is in use. To restore the full functionality of  
the TPMS system, all road wheels equipped with the tire pressure  
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.  
Have a flat tire serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent  
damage to the TPMS sensor, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS) in the Tires, Wheel and Loading chapter. Replace the spare  
tire with a road tire as soon as possible.  
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following  
locations:  
Tool  
Location  
Spare tire  
Under the vehicle, just forward of  
the rear bumper  
Jack, jack handle, wheel nut  
wrench  
Regular Cab: behind seats and  
underneath the jack and tools  
cover  
Cab Plus 4–Door: stowed behind  
the front seats, between jump  
seats and underneath jack and  
tools cover. The lug wrench is held  
in place with a wingnut.  
Key, spare tire lock (if equipped) In the glove box  
Removing the spare tire  
1. Assemble the jack handle to the lug wrench as shown in the  
illustrations.  
189  
PAGE: 189 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 190 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
When connecting the jack handle, assemble the following:  
• one handle extension and one  
typical extension. To assemble,  
slide parts together. To  
art=raner301_a  
art=raner302_a  
disconnect, depress button and  
pull apart.  
• one wheel nut wrench. Depress  
button and slide together.  
2. If equipped, unlock and remove  
the spare tire carrier lock from  
the rear access hole located just  
above the rear bumper and  
below the tailgate.  
art=raner303_a  
190  
PAGE: 190 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 191 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
3. Insert the square end of the  
jack handle into the rear access  
hole located just above the rear  
bumper and below the tailgate.  
art=raner001_a  
Forward motion will stop and  
resistance to turning will be felt  
when properly engaged.  
4. Turn the handle  
counterclockwise until tire is  
lowered to the ground and the  
cable is slightly slack.  
5. Remove the retainer from the  
spare tire.  
CIMS #684806  
Tire change procedure  
com_change_proc.mbs  
itdseq=226  
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the  
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or  
slipping off the jack, even if the vehicle is in P (Park)  
(automatic transmission) or R (Reverse) (manual  
transmission).  
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you  
change a tire, be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in  
both directions) the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other  
side and end of the vehicle) to the tire being changed.  
WARNING: If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone  
else could be seriously injured.  
191  
PAGE: 191 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 192 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
1. Park on a level surface, activate  
hazard flashers and place  
art=unogf300_b  
gearshift lever in P (Park)  
(automatic transmission) or 1  
(First) (manual transmission).  
2. Set the parking brake and turn  
engine OFF.  
3. Block the diagonally opposite  
wheel.  
art=naver301_b  
art=viler304_a  
4. Insert tapered end of the lug  
wrench behind hub caps and  
twist them off.  
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut  
one-half turn counterclockwise  
but do not remove them until  
the wheel is raised off the  
ground.  
6. Position the jack according to  
the following guides and turn  
the jack handle clockwise until the tire is a maximum of 1 inch (25  
mm) off the ground.  
WARNING: To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any  
part of your body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do  
not start the engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack  
is only meant for changing the tire.  
WARNING: Do not let anyone stay in the vehicle when you are  
using the jack; have them stand in a safe place out of traffic  
lanes.  
192  
PAGE: 192 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 193 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
• Front  
art=raner520_a  
• Rear  
art=raner521_a  
Never use the differential as a  
jacking point. It is too easy for  
the vehicle to tilt or fall and you  
can be injured.  
art=mbser300_a  
7. Remove the wheel lug nuts with  
the lug wrench.  
8. Replace the flat tire with the  
spare tire, making sure the valve  
stem is facing outward. Reinstall  
the lug nuts until the wheel is  
snug against the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the  
wheel has been lowered.  
9. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.  
193  
PAGE: 193 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 194 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
10. Remove the jack and fully  
tighten the lug nuts, in the  
order shown. Refer to Wheel  
lug nut torque specifications  
later in this chapter for the  
proper lug nut torque  
1
art=viler305_a  
3
4
specification.  
11. Stow the flat tire. Refer to  
5
2
Stowing the spare tire.  
12. Stow the jack and lug wrench.  
Make sure the jack is fastened so it does not rattle when you drive.  
13. Unblock the wheels.  
CIMS #1112962  
com_stow-tire.ran  
itdseq=227  
Stowing the flat/spare tire  
Note: Failure to follow spare tire stowage instructions may result in  
failure of cable or loss of spare tire.  
1. Lay the tire on the ground with the valve stem facing up.  
2. Slide the wheel partially under the vehicle and install the wire and  
retainer through the center of the wheel.  
3. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its original  
position underneath the vehicle. The effort to turn the jack handle  
increases significantly as the tire contacts the frame. The spare tire  
carrier will ratchet when the tire is in the fully stowed position. The  
spare tire carrier has a built-in ratchet feature that will not allow you  
to overtighten. If the spare tire carrier ratchets with very little effort,  
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer for assistance at your  
earliest convenience.  
4. Check that the tire lies flat against the frame assembly. Push against  
the tire to make sure it is tightly seated under the vehicle. Loosen  
and retighten, if necessary. Failure to properly stow the spare tire  
may result in failure of the winch cable and loss of the spare tire.  
5. Repeat this tightness check procedure when servicing the spare tire  
pressure (every six months, per Service Maintenance Section), or  
at any time that the spare tire is disturbed through service of other  
components.  
6. Install the spare tire lock (if equipped) into the access hole above  
the rear bumper with the spare tire lock key (if equipped) and jack  
handle.  
194  
PAGE: 194 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 195 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #1244586  
com_lug-nut-torque.p150  
itdseq=228  
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS  
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 km)  
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).  
Lug nut socket  
size/Bolt size  
Lug nut socket size:  
Wheel lug nut torque*  
lb.ft.  
100  
N•m  
135  
3
⁄
4” (19 mm) hex  
1
Bolt size: ⁄2 x 20  
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and  
rust. Use only Mazda recommended replacement fasteners.  
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any  
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting  
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake  
drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any  
fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they  
do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel.  
Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the  
wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen  
and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion,  
resulting in loss of control.  
Note: If there is corrosion on the area where the wheel contacts the  
hub, apply a thin film of grease or anti-seize compound on that area.  
CIMS #1137423  
OVERHEATING  
com_overheating-mazdas  
itdseq=229  
If the temperature gauge indicates overheating and you experience  
power loss, you hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine is  
probably too hot.  
If this happens:  
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way.  
2. Shift the automatic transmission into P (Park) or the manual  
transmission into the neutral position, and apply the parking brake.  
3. Turn off the air conditioner.  
WARNING: Steam from an overheated engine is dangerous. The  
escaping steam could seriously burn you. Open the hood ONLY  
after steam is no longer escaping from the engine.  
195  
PAGE: 195 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 196 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
4. Check whether coolant or steam is escaping from under the hood or  
from the engine compartment.  
• If steam is coming from the engine compartment: do not go near  
the front of the vehicle. Stop the engine, then turn the ignition switch  
to the ON position without starting the engine. The radiator cooling  
fans will start to cool the engine.  
• If neither coolant nor steam is escaping: open the hood and idle  
the engine until it cools. If this does not lower the temperature, stop  
the engine and let it cool.  
5. Check the coolant level. If it is low, look for leaks in the radiator  
hoses and connections, heater hoses and connections, radiator and  
water pump.  
If you find a leak or other damage, or if coolant is still leaking, stop the  
engine and call an authorized dealer.  
WARNING: When the engine and radiator are hot, scalding  
coolant and steam may shoot out under pressure and cause  
serious injury. Do not remove the cooling system cap when the  
engine and radiator are hot.  
See Adding coolant in the Maintenance and Specifications section. If  
you find no problems, the engine is cool and no leaks are obvious,  
carefully add coolant as required.  
Note: If the engine continues to overheat or frequently overheats, have  
the cooling system inspected. The engine could be seriously damaged  
unless repairs are made.  
CIMS #52573 com_jump-start  
itdseq=230  
JUMP STARTING  
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if  
exposed to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could  
result in injury or vehicle damage.  
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,  
eyes and clothing, if contacted.  
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission  
vehicle. Automatic transmissions do not have push-start  
capability. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic  
transmission may cause transmission damage.  
196  
PAGE: 196 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 197 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #57613  
com_prep-for-jump  
itdseq=231  
Preparing your vehicle  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the  
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the  
transmission may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is  
considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the  
transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully update  
transmission operation.  
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.  
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could  
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.  
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle  
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on  
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other  
moving parts.  
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion  
before you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight  
and level.  
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical  
surges. Turn all other accessories off.  
CIMS #1269598  
Connecting the jumper cables  
com_connecting-cables.mbs  
itdseq=232  
art=coner703_a  
–
–
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of  
the discharged battery.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
197  
PAGE: 197 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 198 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
art=coner702_a  
–
–
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)  
terminal of the assisting battery.  
art=coner701_a  
–
–
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the  
assisting battery.  
198  
PAGE: 198 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 199 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
art=coner700_a  
–
–
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed  
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and  
the fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker covers  
or the intake manifold as grounding points.  
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the  
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may  
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.  
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of  
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.  
CIMS #52575  
com_jump_starts  
itdseq=233  
Jump starting  
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at  
moderately increased speed.  
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.  
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an  
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.  
199  
PAGE: 199 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 200 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #52576  
Removing the jumper cables  
com_removing-cables  
itdseq=234  
art=coner700_a  
–
–
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were  
connected.  
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.  
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the  
assisting (boosting) battery.  
art=coner701_a  
–
–
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the  
booster vehicle’s battery.  
200  
PAGE: 200 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 201 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
art=coner702_a  
–
–
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
booster vehicle’s battery.  
art=coner703_a  
–
–
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the  
disabled vehicle’s battery.  
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables  
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can  
relearn its idle conditions.  
201  
PAGE: 201 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 202 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Roadside Emergencies  
CIMS #1218646  
com_tow.no-sling-mbs  
itdseq=235  
WRECKER TOWING  
art=winer104_a  
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing  
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your  
roadside assistance service provider.  
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift or flatbed  
equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Mazda has not approved a  
slingbelt towing procedure.  
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front  
wheels on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground.  
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a  
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the  
ground.  
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle  
damage may occur.  
202  
PAGE: 202 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 203 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
CIMS #921592  
com_assist-usa  
itdseq=236  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (U.S.A. MAINLAND AND HAWAII)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to  
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the  
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement  
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized  
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following  
steps:  
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest  
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved  
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS  
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the  
authorized dealer or the OWNER.  
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations  
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting  
your authorized dealer management, you can reach Mazda North  
American Operations by one of the following ways:  
Log on at: www.mazdaUSA.com.  
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local  
Authorized Mazda Dealership in the U.S., can be found here.  
By email at: www.mazdaUSA.com (Click on CONTACT US at the bottom  
of the home page).  
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500  
By letter at:  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623–9734  
Whatever way you contact us, please help us to serve you more  
efficiently and effectively by providing the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration  
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)  
203  
PAGE: 203 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 204 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda  
Distributor.  
CIMS #  
com_assist-canada  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (CANADA)  
itdseq=237  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to  
serve you. All Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the  
tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
In our experience, any questions, problems or complaints regarding the  
operation of your Mazda or any other general service transactions are  
most effectively resolved by your authorized dealer. If the cause of your  
dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal authorized  
dealer procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:  
STEP 1: Contact Your Authorized Mazda Dealer  
Discuss the matter with a member of authorized dealer management. If  
the Service Manager has already reviewed your concerns, contact the  
owner of the authorized dealer or its General Manager.  
STEP 2: Call the Mazda Regional Office  
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the authorized dealer  
Service Manager to arrange for you to meet the local Mazda Service  
Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda Canada Inc. Regional  
Office nearest you for such arrangements.  
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department  
If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations  
Department, Mazda Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario  
L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680.  
Provide the Department with the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to Vehicle identification  
label in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter of this manual  
for the location of the VIN.  
4. Purchase date.  
5. Present odometer reading.  
204  
PAGE: 204 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 205 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
6. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction.  
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service  
Representative, will review the case to determine if everything possible  
has been done to ensure your satisfaction.  
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases  
requires the use of your authorized dealer’s service facilities, personnel  
and equipment. We urge you to follow the above three steps in sequence  
therefore for most effective results.  
CIMS #1493251  
Mediation/Arbitration Program  
com_mediation-arbit-mazda  
itdseq=238  
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda’s  
Customer Satisfaction Program. If after exhausting procedures in this  
manual, your concern is still not resolved, you have another option.  
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered  
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will  
advise you about how your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an  
independent third party through binding arbitration.  
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our  
authorized dealers. Mazda’s participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable  
contribution to our achieving that goal. There is no charge for using  
CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as the award is binding  
on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.  
CIMS #1493253  
com_camvap-mazda2  
itdseq=239  
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)  
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealerships. If a specific  
item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an  
owner, Mazda, and/or one of it’s authorized dealers (that all parties  
cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to use the services offered by  
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).  
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist  
consumers in scheduling and preparing for their arbitration hearings.  
However, before you can proceed with CAMVAP you must follow your  
Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.  
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories. Consumers  
wishing to obtain further information about the Program can obtain an  
information booklet from their authorized dealer, the Provincial  
Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor  
Vehicle Arbitration Office At:  
205  
PAGE: 205 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 206 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
235 Yorkland Boulevard, Suite 407  
North York, Ontario  
M2J 4Y8  
http://camvap.ca  
CIMS #1493252  
com_reg-office-mazda  
itdseq=240  
Regional Offices  
Regional Offices  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Western Region  
8171 Ackroyd Road  
Suite 2000  
Areas Covered  
Alberta,  
British Columbia,  
Manitoba,  
Richmond, B.C.  
V6X 3K1  
Saskatchewan,  
Yukon  
(604) 303–5670  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Central Region  
55 Vogell Road  
Richmond Hill, Ontario.  
L4B 3K5  
Ontario  
1 (800) 263–4680  
Mazda Canada Inc.  
Quebec Region/Atlantic Region  
6111 Route Trans  
Canadienne  
Quebec,  
New Brunswick,  
Nova Scotia,  
Pointe Claire, Quebec  
H9R 5A5  
Prince Edward Island,  
Newfoundland  
(514) 694–6390  
CIMS #605763  
com_assist-puertorico  
itdseq=241  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE (PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS)  
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all  
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep  
your Mazda vehicle in top condition.  
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement  
regarding the service of your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Authorized  
Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take the following  
steps:  
STEP 1  
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest  
and best way to address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved  
206  
PAGE: 206 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 207 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS  
MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of the  
authorized dealer or the OWNER.  
STEP 2  
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please  
contact your area’s Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).  
Please help us by providing the following information:  
1. Your name, address, and telephone number  
2. Year and model of vehicle  
3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration  
or title or located on the upper driver’s side corner of the dash)  
4. Purchase date and current mileage  
5. Your authorized dealer’s name and location  
6. Your question(s)  
If you would like to write a letter, please address it to the following,  
Attn: Customer Assistance  
Plaza Motors Corp.  
Mazda de Puerto Rico  
P.O. Box 362722  
San Juan, Puerto Rico  
00936–2722  
Tel: (787) 788–9300  
This way, we can be sure to respond to you as efficiently as possible.  
That is our goal.  
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda  
Distributor.  
CIMS #1066951  
com_lemon-law.mazda  
itdseq=242  
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)  
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer  
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the  
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of  
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the  
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and  
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or  
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer  
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund  
or replacement vehicle.  
207  
PAGE: 207 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 208 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer  
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its  
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership  
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs  
first:  
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity  
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR  
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity  
(a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or  
safety of the vehicle) OR  
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total  
of more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time).  
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the  
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the  
following address:  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755, Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
CIMS #605764  
com_distributors  
itdseq=243  
MAZDA IMPORTERS/DISTRIBUTORS  
U.S.A (Importer/Distributor)  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755 Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, CA 92618–2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623–9734  
TEL: 1 (800) 222–5500 (in U.S.A.)  
(949) 727–1990 (outside U.S.A.)  
(Distributor in each area)  
CANADA  
Mazda Canada, Inc.  
55 Vogell Road  
Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 3K5 Canada  
TEL: 1 (800) 263–4680 (in Canada)  
(416) 609–9909 (outside Canada)  
PUERTO RICO & VIRGIN ISLANDS  
Plaza Motors Corp. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)  
P.O. Box 362722, San Juan, Puerto Rico 00936–2722  
TEL: (787) 788–9300  
208  
PAGE: 208 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 209 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
GUAM  
(d.b.a. Triple J. Enterprises, Inc.)  
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam  
TEL: (671) 646–9216  
SAIPAN  
Pacific International Marianas, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)  
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950  
TEL: (670) 234–7524  
Triple J Saipan, Inc.  
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)  
Beach Road  
Chalan LauLau  
Saipan, MP 96950  
TEL: (670) 235–4868  
AMERICAN SAMOA  
Polynesia Motors, Inc.  
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American Samoa 96799  
TEL: (684) 699–1854  
CIMS #1493254  
com_warranties-mazda2  
itdseq=244  
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR MAZDA  
• New Vehicle Limited Warranty  
• Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty  
• Anti-perforation Limited Warranty  
• Federal Emission Control Warranty  
– Emission Defect Warranty  
– Emission Performance Warranty  
• California Emission Control Warranty (if applicable)  
• Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty  
• Tire Warranty  
NOTE: Detailed warranty information is provided with your Mazda  
portfolio.  
CIMS #1493255  
com_outside-us-mazda  
itdseq=245  
Outside the United States  
Government regulations in the United States require that automobiles  
meet specific emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore,  
vehicles built for use in the United States, may differ from those sold in  
other countries.  
209  
PAGE: 209 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 210 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle  
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly  
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside the United States.  
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently,  
Mazda vehicles built for use in the United States could be eligible for  
exportation to Canada with specific vehicle modifications to comply with  
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.  
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export  
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside  
of the United States:  
• Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or  
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the  
emission controls and engine.  
• Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement  
parts may not be available.  
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more  
information.  
CIMS #1493256  
com_outside-can-mazda  
itdseq=246  
Outside Canada  
Government regulations in Canada require that automobiles meet specific  
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for  
use in Canada, may differ from those sold in other countries.  
The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle  
to receive satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly  
recommend that you NOT take your Mazda outside Canada. However, in  
the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda  
vehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the  
United States with specific vehicle modifications to comply with the  
United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety requirements.  
Special Note: The above is applicable for permanent import/export  
situations and not related to travelers on vacation.  
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside  
of Canada:  
• Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or  
low-octane fuel will affect vehicle performance and damage the  
emission controls and engine.  
• Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement  
parts may not be available.  
210  
PAGE: 210 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 211 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
Please refer to your manufacturers warranty booklet for more  
information.  
CIMS #606351  
ADD-ON NON-GENUINE PARTS AND ACCESSORIES  
com_non-genuine-accessories  
itdseq=247  
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in  
stores. These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by the  
manufacturer for use with Mazda vehicles. When you install non-genuine  
parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle’s performance or  
safety system; the manufacturer’s warranty doesn’t cover this. Before you  
install any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
WARNING: Installation of Non-Genuine Parts or Accessories:  
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories could be  
dangerous. Improperly designed parts or accessories could  
seriously affect your vehicle’s performance or safety system.  
This could cause you to have an accident or increase your  
chances of injuries in an accident. Always consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or  
accessories.  
WARNING: Add-On Electrical and Electronic Equipment:  
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or  
choosing an improper installer could be dangerous. Essential  
systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, air-bag  
(SRS) activation, ABS inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle. Be  
very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical  
equipment, such as mobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo  
systems, and car alarm systems.  
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may  
result from the installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.  
CIMS #689691  
SERVICE PUBLICATIONS  
com_service-pubs.mbs  
itdseq=248  
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners  
who wish to do some of their own maintenance and repair.  
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer, refer to the chart below.  
If they don’t have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.  
211  
PAGE: 211 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 212 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER  
9999 95 022B 06  
PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION  
WORKSHOP MANUAL  
WIRING DIAGRAM  
9999 95 020G 06  
9999 95 023C 06  
OWNER’S MANUAL  
WORKSHOP MANUAL:  
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive  
train, body and chassis.  
WIRING DIAGRAM:  
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the  
entire electrical system.  
OWNER’S MANUAL:  
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and  
operation of your vehicle. This is not a technician’s manual.  
Please note that your Authorized Mazda Dealership has trained  
personnel and special service tools to correctly and safely  
maintain Mazda vehicles.  
CIMS #606352  
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS  
com_report-safe-defects  
itdseq=249  
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or  
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National  
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying  
your Mazda importer/distributor.  
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and  
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a  
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved  
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or your Mazda  
importer/distributor).  
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at  
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;  
or write to:  
NHTSA  
400 Seventh Street, SW  
Washington, D.C. 20590  
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from  
http://www.safercar.gov.  
(Note)  
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to:  
212  
PAGE: 212 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 213 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Customer Assistance  
Mazda North American Operations  
7755, Irvine Center Drive  
Irvine, California 92618–2922  
P.O. Box 19734  
Irvine, CA 92623–9734  
Customer Assistance Center  
or toll free at 1 (800) 222–5500  
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda  
Distributor. See the Mazda importers/distributors section in this  
chapter.  
213  
PAGE: 213 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 214 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Cleaning  
CIMS #1091385  
com_ext-wash.mazda  
itdseq=250  
WASHING THE EXTERIOR  
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral  
pH shampoo.  
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing  
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted  
surfaces.  
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to  
strong, direct sunlight.  
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for  
best results.  
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to  
eliminate water spotting.  
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the  
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause  
damage to the vehicle.  
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings  
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s  
paintwork and trim over time.  
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a  
car wash.  
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted  
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,  
wash off as soon as possible.  
CIMS #1521416  
com_exterior-wax.mazda  
itdseq=251  
WAXING  
Applying a premium paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will  
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.  
• Wash the vehicle first. Refer to Washing the exterior for more  
detailed information.  
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives; use a premium liquid wax.  
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body  
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof  
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl  
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.  
CIMS #1001622  
com_chip-repair.mazfly  
itdseq=252  
PAINT CHIPS  
Your dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. Touch-up  
paint can be used to repair minor scratches to painted surfaces.  
214  
PAGE: 214 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 215 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Cleaning  
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar  
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.  
• Always read the instructions before using the products.  
CIMS #1001623  
com_wheel-rim.mazfly  
itdseq=253  
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND COVERS  
Aluminum wheel rims or covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish.  
In order to maintain their shine:  
• Clean with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo.  
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or  
covers.  
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your  
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning  
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust  
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.  
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel  
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.  
• To remove tar and grease, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil  
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available from your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
CIMS #1010871  
com_engine-fly.mbs  
itdseq=254  
ENGINE  
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt  
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:  
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The  
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause  
damage.  
• Never spray the engine or other engine components with water. Water  
will damage the engine or other engine components.  
• Spray Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (0000–77–410E-09), available at  
your authorized Mazda dealer, on all parts that require cleaning and  
pressure rinse clean.  
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning  
the engine.  
215  
PAGE: 215 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 216 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Cleaning  
• 2.3L Engine  
art=ranmc723_e  
2.3L  
16 VALVE  
• 3.0L Engine  
art=ranmc704_b  
216  
PAGE: 216 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 217 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Cleaning  
• 4.0L Engine  
art=ranmc708_b  
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the  
running engine may cause internal damage.  
CIMS #1001625  
com_ext-plastic.mazfly  
itdseq=255  
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS  
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are  
available from your dealer.  
• For routine cleaning, use cool or lukewarm water with a neutral pH  
shampoo.  
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Extra Strength Tar and Road Oil  
Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
CIMS #1001626  
com_wiper.mazfly  
itdseq=256  
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES  
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be  
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the  
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include  
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, water repellant  
coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants  
may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and streaking and  
smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow these tips:  
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with  
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner  
(0000–77–400E-01 and 0000–77–400E-02), available from your  
authorized Mazda dealer.  
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or a  
windshield washer concentrate. This washer fluid concentrate contains  
217  
PAGE: 217 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 218 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Cleaning  
a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot  
wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car  
wash facilities. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear  
worn or do not function properly.  
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.  
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.  
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS  
CIMS #1521418  
com_inst-panel.mazda  
itdseq=257  
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry  
cloth, or use Mazda Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner  
(0000–77–430E-15).  
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of  
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the  
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.  
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents  
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid  
contamination of the airbag system.  
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in  
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan  
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted  
surfaces.  
CIMS #1521417  
com_woodtone.mazda  
itdseq=258  
INTERIOR TRIM  
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then with a clean, dry  
cloth; you may also use Mazda Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner  
(0000–77–430E-15).  
• Do not use household or glass cleaners, as these may damage the  
finish.  
CIMS #1129642  
com_fabric.mazfly-no  
itdseq=259  
INTERIOR  
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, and safety belts:  
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.  
• Remove light stains and soil with Upholstery Cleaner and Spot  
Remover (0000–77–430E-01), available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first  
with Spot and Stain Remover (0000–77–410E-01), available at your  
authorized Mazda dealer.  
218  
PAGE: 218 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 219 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Cleaning  
• If a solvent ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the  
entire area immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.  
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can  
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of  
the seat materials.  
CIMS #  
com_underbody-fly  
UNDERBODY  
itdseq=260  
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and  
door drain holes free from packed dirt.  
CIMS #1001629  
com_care-prods.mazfly  
itdseq=261  
MAZDA CAR CARE PRODUCTS  
Your Mazda dealer has many quality products available to clean your  
vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products have been  
specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they are custom  
designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle. Each  
product is made from high quality materials that meet or exceed rigid  
specifications. For best results, use these products or products of  
equivalent quality. These products are available at your authorized Mazda  
dealer.  
219  
PAGE: 219 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 220 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #608142  
com_maint-intro.j14  
itdseq=262  
INTRODUCTION  
Be extremely careful to prevent injury to yourself and others or damage  
to your vehicle when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.  
If you’re unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you  
to have a reliable and qualified service shop perform the work, preferably  
an authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for  
your vehicle. Without this expertise and the parts that have been  
designed and made especially for your Mazda, inadequate, incomplete,  
and insufficient servicing may result in problems. This could lead to  
vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.  
For expert advice and quality service, consult an authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
The owner should retain evidence that proper maintenance has been  
performed as prescribed.  
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as  
opposed to defective materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will  
not be honored.  
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda’s original  
equipment may perform maintenance. But we recommend that it  
always be done by an authorized Mazda Dealer using genuine  
Mazda parts.  
CIMS #684323  
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE  
com_maintenance.mbs  
itdseq=263  
Schedule 1 — Normal Driving Conditions/Emission Control  
Systems  
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the  
following conditions apply. If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.  
• Repeated short-distance driving.  
• Driving in dusty conditions.  
• Towing a trailer.  
• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.  
• Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation.  
• High-speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle.  
• Off-road operation.  
NOTE: After the described period, continue to follow the described  
maintenance at the recommended intervals.  
220  
PAGE: 220 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 221 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CHART SYMBOLS  
I: Inspect and if necessary, correct, clean or replace  
A Adjust  
R: Replace  
L: Lubricate  
Normal driving service intervals — perform at the months or distances  
shown, whichever occurs first.  
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),  
whichever comes first)  
Months  
4
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44  
48  
60  
Maintenance Item  
x 1000 miles  
(x 1000 km)  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55  
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)  
ENGINE  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Oil filter  
PCV valve  
*3  
AIR CLEANER  
Air cleaner filter  
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
R
R
*4  
COOLING SYSTEM  
Engine Coolant (yellow)  
Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72  
months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)  
or 36 months  
Coolant condition and protection,  
hoses and clamps — annually —  
prior to cold weather every 12  
months  
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS AND BODY  
Wheel lug nut torque  
*1  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X  
= recommended interval for optimal  
tire life)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Clutch reservoir fluid level  
Front wheel bearings (4x2)  
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
221  
PAGE: 221 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 222 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),  
whichever comes first)  
Months  
4
5
8
12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44  
48  
60  
Maintenance Item  
x 1000 miles  
(x 1000 km)  
10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55  
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)  
Disc brake system  
Caliper slide rails  
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
Drum brake system, lines and hoses  
Exhaust system for leaks, damage,  
looseness  
I
I
Manual transmission fluid  
Automatic  
transmission fluid  
*2  
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system shielding (for  
trapped material)  
Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped  
with grease fittings)  
L
L
I
L
L
L
I
L
Parking brake system (for damage  
and operation)  
I
I
Ball joints (4x2)  
I/L  
I/L  
I/L  
I/L  
Transfer case fluid (4x4)  
Rear axle lubricant  
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)  
Does not require replacement unless rear axle  
submerged in water  
Accessory drive belts  
Fuel filter  
*5  
R
I
R
Steering linkage, ball joints,  
suspension and driveshaft  
I
I
I
*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications  
at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or  
at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel  
Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading  
chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.  
*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.  
*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at  
no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.  
*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and  
gap specifications.  
222  
PAGE: 222 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 223 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to  
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor  
limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.  
Schedule 1 continued  
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),  
whichever comes first)  
Months  
52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92  
96  
Maintenance Item  
x 1000 miles  
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120  
(x 1000 km) (104)(112)(121)(128)(136)(144)(152)(160)(168)(176)(184) (192)  
ENGINE  
Engine oil  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Oil filter  
PCV valve  
*3  
*4  
AIR CLEANER  
Air cleaner filter  
IGNITION SYSTEM  
Spark plugs  
R
R
R
COOLING SYSTEM  
Engine Coolant (yellow)  
Replace at first 100,000 miles (160,000 km) or 72  
months; after that, every 50,000 miles (80,000 km)  
or 36 months  
Coolant condition and protection,  
I
I
I
I
hoses and clamps — annually —prior  
to cold weather every 12 months  
CHASSIS AND BODY  
Wheel lug nut torque  
*1  
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Inspect tires for wear and rotate (X  
= recommended interval for optimal  
tire life)  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Clutch reservoir fluid level  
Front wheel bearings (4x2)  
Disc brake system  
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
I
L
I
Caliper slide rails  
L
I
Drum brake system, lines and hoses  
223  
PAGE: 223 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 224 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or Miles (km),  
whichever comes first)  
Months  
52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92  
96  
Maintenance Item  
x 1000 miles  
65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120  
(x 1000 km) (104)(112)(121)(128)(136)(144)(152)(160)(168)(176)(184) (192)  
Exhaust system for leaks, damage,  
looseness  
I
I
Manual transmission fluid  
R
Automatic  
transmission fluid  
*2  
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system shielding (for  
trapped material)  
Propeller shaft U-joints (if equipped  
with grease fittings)  
L
L
I
L
L
L
I
L
Parking brake system (for damage  
and operation)  
I
I
Ball joints (4x2)  
I/L  
I/L  
I/L  
I/L  
Transfer case fluid (4x4)  
Rear axle lubricant  
Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km)  
Does not require replacement unless rear axle  
submerged in water  
Accessory drive belts  
I
Fuel filter  
*5  
R
I
R
Steering linkage, ball joints,  
suspension and driveshaft  
I
I
I
*1 The wheel lug nuts must be retightened to the proper specifications  
at 500 miles (800 km) of new vehicle operation, at any wheel change, or  
at any other time the wheel lug nuts have been loosened. Refer to Wheel  
Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels and Loading  
chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.  
*2 Replace every 150,000 miles (240,000 km) unless submerged in water.  
*3 At 60,000 miles (96,000 km), the dealer will replace the PCV valve at  
no cost, except Canada and California vehicles.  
*4 Refer to vehicle emission control information label for spark plug and  
gap specifications.  
*5 The California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to  
perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty nor  
limit recall liability prior to completion of the vehicle’s useful life.  
224  
PAGE: 224 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 225 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
SCHEDULE 2 — SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS  
If your driving habits FREQUENTLY include one or more of the  
following conditions:  
• Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) when outside temperatures  
remain below freezing.  
• Towing a trailer, or carrying maximum loads.  
• Operating in severe dust conditions.  
• Operating during hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.  
• Extensive idling, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery service.  
• High speed operation with a fully loaded vehicle (max. GVW).  
• Off-road operation  
Change ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER every 3 months or 3,000 miles  
(4,800 km) whichever occurs first.  
NOTE: Idling the engine for extended periods will accumulate more  
hours of use on your vehicle than is actually indicated by the mileage  
odometer. Consequently, the odometer reading can be often misleading  
when determining the right time to change your engine oil and filter. If  
you are using your vehicle in a manner which allows it to remain  
stationary while the engine is running for long periods (door-to-door  
delivery, taxi, police, power/utility company trucks, or similar duty), then  
Mazda recommends you increase the frequency of oil and filter changes  
to an interval equivalent to 200 ENGINE HOURS or use. Since most  
vehicles are not equipped with hour-meters, it may be necessary for you  
to approximate your idle time and plan oil/filter changes accordingly.  
225  
PAGE: 225 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 226 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Special Operating  
Conditions  
3,000  
miles or  
3 months  
Suggested Maintenance  
Interval  
5,000 15,000 30,000 60,000  
miles miles miles miles required required required miles miles  
As  
As  
As  
30,000 60,000  
Towing a trailer or  
using a camper or  
car top carrier  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Extensive idling or  
low-speed driving  
for long distances  
as in heavy  
commercial use  
such as delivery,  
taxi or patrol car  
X
X
X
X
X
X
Operating in dusty  
conditions such as  
unpaved or dusty  
roads  
X
X
X
X
Off road operation  
X
X
For specific recommendations see your authorized Mazda dealer or  
qualified service professional.  
OWNER MAINTENANCE  
Owner Maintenance Schedule  
The owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle  
inspections at the indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable  
operation.  
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or  
qualified service technician as soon as possible.  
While operating your vehicle  
226  
PAGE: 226 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 227 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell or exhaust  
fumes in the vehicle.  
• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased  
steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in the  
straight ahead position.  
• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or “pulls” to one side  
when traveling on a smooth, level road.  
• When stopping, listen and check for strange sounds, pulling to one  
side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard to push” brake pedal.  
• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occur,  
check the transmission fluid level.  
• Check automatic transmission Park function.  
• Check parking brake.  
At least monthly  
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.  
• Check tires for wear and proper air pressure.  
• Check engine oil level.  
• Check coolant level in the coolant reservoir.  
• Check washer fluid level.  
At least twice a year (for example, every spring and fall)  
• Check power steering fluid level.  
• Check clutch fluid level (if equipped).  
• Check and clean body and door drain holes.  
• Check and lubricate all hinges, latches, and outside locks.  
• Check and lubricate door rubber weather strips.  
• Check parking brake for proper operation.  
• Check lap/shoulder belts and seat latches for wear and function.  
• Check air pressure in spare tire.  
• Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper  
blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.  
• Check safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, air bag, safety belt) for  
operation.  
• Check cooling system fluid level and verify coolant specific gravity is  
correct for summer or winter conditions.  
227  
PAGE: 227 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 228 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• Check battery water level (non-maintenance free).  
• Check battery connections and clean if necessary.  
Retightening lug nuts  
• Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)  
after any wheel disturbance (tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel  
removal, etc.).  
• Refer to Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specification in the Tires, Wheels  
and Loading chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification.  
CIMS #604851  
com_ser_rec.j14  
itdseq=264  
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS  
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance  
information which makes tracking routine service easy.  
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can  
provide necessary parts and service. Check your “Warranty Information”  
to find out which parts and services are covered.  
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts  
conforming to specifications. Genuine Mazda parts are designed and built  
to provide the best performance in your vehicle.  
CIMS #83506  
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE  
• Do not work on a hot engine.  
com_precautions_servicing.04  
itdseq=265  
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.  
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed  
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.  
• Keep all open flames and other lit material away from the battery and  
all fuel related parts.  
CIMS #83508  
Working with the engine off  
• Automatic transmission:  
com_working_off.05  
itdseq=266  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
3. Block the wheels.  
• Manual transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in 1  
(First).  
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.  
228  
PAGE: 228 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 229 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
3. Block the wheels.  
CIMS #83511  
Working with the engine on  
• Automatic transmission:  
com_working_on.05  
itdseq=267  
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).  
2. Block the wheels.  
• Manual transmission:  
1. Set the parking brake, depress the clutch and place the gearshift in  
N (Neutral).  
2. Block the wheels.  
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or  
personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air  
cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is  
running.  
CIMS #555081 com_hood-title  
itdseq=268  
OPENING THE HOOD  
CIMS #80404  
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood  
release handle located under  
the bottom of the instrument  
panel near the steering column.  
com_hood_open.03  
itdseq=269  
art=unogf302_a  
2. Go to the front of the vehicle  
and release the auxiliary latch  
that is located under the front  
center of the hood.  
3. Lift the hood and support it  
with the prop rod.  
229  
PAGE: 229 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 230 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT  
2.3L I4 engine  
CIMS #71972  
com_engine-comp  
itdseq=270  
CIMS #528617 com_2.3L-mbs  
itdseq=271  
art=ranmc141_b  
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
2. Engine coolant reservoir  
3. Engine oil dipstick  
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)  
5. Engine oil filler cap  
6. Brake fluid reservoir  
7. Power distribution box  
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)  
9. Battery  
10. Power steering fluid reservoir  
11. Air filter assembly  
230  
PAGE: 230 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 231 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #689982 com_3.0L-mbs  
itdseq=272  
3.0L V6 engine  
art=ranmc115_h  
1. Engine coolant reservoir  
2. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
3. Engine oil filler cap  
4. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)  
5. Engine oil dipstick  
6. Brake fluid reservoir  
7. Power distribution box  
8. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)  
9. Battery  
10. Power steering fluid reservoir  
11. Air filter assembly  
231  
PAGE: 231 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 232 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #713068  
com_4.0L-sohc.mbs  
itdseq=273  
4.0L SOHC V6 engine  
art=expmc101_m  
1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir  
2. Transmission fluid dipstick (automatic transmission)  
3. Engine oil filler cap  
4. Engine oil dipstick  
5. Brake fluid reservoir  
6. Power distribution box  
7. Clutch fluid reservoir (manual transmission)  
8. Battery  
9. Power steering fluid reservoir  
10. Air filter assembly  
11. Engine coolant reservoir  
232  
PAGE: 232 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 233 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #232781  
com_windshield_fluid  
itdseq=274  
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID  
CIMS #918793  
com_wash_fluid.mbs  
itdseq=275  
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the  
level is low. In very cold weather, do  
not fill the reservoir completely.  
art=ranmc301_b  
E
H R  
S
F
A
LU  
W
ID  
O
N
L
Y
RADIATOR  
COOLANT  
ONLY  
Only use a washer fluid that meets Mazda specification . Do not use any  
special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug  
wash. They may cause squeaking, chatter noise, streaking and smearing.  
Refer to Refill capacities in this chapter.  
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the  
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.  
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used  
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the  
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.  
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below  
40° F (4.5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection.  
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold  
weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase  
the risk of injury or accident.  
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer  
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system  
components.  
CIMS #1123866  
com_check_wipers.mbs  
itdseq=276  
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES  
If the wiper blades do not wipe properly, clean both the windshield and  
wiper blades using undiluted windshield wiper solution or a mild  
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clean water. To avoid damaging the  
blades, do not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner or other solvents.  
233  
PAGE: 233 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 234 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Check the wiper blades for wear at least twice a year or when they seem  
less effective. Substances such as tree sap and some hot wax treatments  
used by commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness of wiper blades.  
CIMS #959871  
com_chnge_blades.fly  
itdseq=277  
Changing the wiper blades  
1. Pull the wiper arm away from  
the vehicle. Turn the blade at an  
angle from the wiper arm. Push  
the lock pin manually to release  
the blade and pull the wiper  
blade down toward the  
art=dnomc009_a  
windshield to remove it from  
the arm.  
2. Attach the new wiper to the  
wiper arm and press it into  
place until a click is heard.  
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.  
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the  
windshield, refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning  
chapter.  
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to  
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The  
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the  
wiper rubber element.  
CIMS #52549  
itdseq=278  
com_oil  
ENGINE OIL  
CIMS #1127536  
com_chk-oil.maztrk  
itdseq=279  
Checking the engine oil  
Refer to scheduled maintenance for the appropriate intervals for  
checking the engine oil.  
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.  
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into  
the oil pan.  
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in  
P (Park) (automatic transmission) or 1 (First) (manual  
transmission).  
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.  
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).  
234  
PAGE: 234 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 235 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• 2.3L I4 engine  
art=ranmc135_d  
MIN  
MAX  
• 3.0L V6 engine  
art=ranmc156_a  
235  
PAGE: 235 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 236 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine  
art=ranmc139_c  
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it  
again.  
• If the oil level is between the two holes or between the MIN and  
MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable,  
DO NOT ADD OIL.  
• If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough  
oil to raise the level between the two holes or between the MIN-MAX  
range.  
• 2.3L I4 engine  
SAE 5W-20  
art=ranmc136_b  
236  
PAGE: 236 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 237 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• 3.0L V6 engine  
SAE 5W-20  
art=ranmc122_b  
• 4.0L SOHC V6 engine  
SAE 5W-30  
art=207mc008_c  
• Oil levels above the MAX mark or upper hole may cause engine  
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized  
dealer.  
7. Put the indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.  
237  
PAGE: 237 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 238 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #1286226  
com_add-oil.qtr-turn  
itdseq=280  
Adding engine oil  
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine  
oil in this chapter.  
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only  
certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine  
oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.  
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is within the  
normal range on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).  
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.  
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap 1/4 turn  
until it stops.  
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the  
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.  
CIMS #689983  
com_oil-rec.5w20.mbs  
itdseq=281  
Engine Oil Recommendations  
2.3L & 3.0L Engines  
Look for this certification  
trademark.  
art=expii004_a  
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended.  
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms  
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel  
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and  
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent oil Mazda specification.  
SAE 5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability  
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.  
238  
PAGE: 238 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 239 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule  
listed in scheduled maintenance.  
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine  
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,  
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.  
4.0L Engine  
Look for this certification  
trademark.  
art=expii004_a  
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.  
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American  
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms  
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel  
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and  
Approval Committee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese  
automobile manufacturers. Use an equivalent Mazda Specification.  
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, oil treatments or engine  
treatments. They are unnecessary and could, under certain conditions,  
lead to engine damage which is not covered by your warranty.  
Change your engine oil according to the appropriate schedule listed in  
scheduled maintenance.  
Engine Oil Filter Recommendation  
Change your engine oil filter according to the appropriate schedule listed  
in scheduled maintenance. Mazda production and aftermarket (Mazda)  
oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life. If a  
replacement oil filter is used that does not meet Mazda Material and  
design specifications, start-up engine noises or knock may be  
experienced.  
239  
PAGE: 239 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 240 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
It is recommended you use the appropriate Mazda oil filter (or another  
brand meeting Mazda specifications) for your engine.  
CIMS #918794  
com_battery.mbs  
itdseq=282  
BATTERY  
Your vehicle is equipped with a  
Mazda maintenance-free battery  
which normally does not require  
additional water during its life of  
service.  
art=ranmc105_b  
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled  
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.  
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and  
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to  
the battery terminals.  
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables  
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the  
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.  
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to  
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect  
battery performance and durability.  
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be  
disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an  
extended period of time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery  
during storage.  
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which  
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,  
sparks or lighted substances to come near the battery. When  
working near the battery, always shield your face and protect  
your eyes. Always provide proper ventilation.  
240  
PAGE: 240 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 241 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive  
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the  
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the  
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with  
your hands on opposite corners.  
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries  
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.  
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect  
against possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid  
contact with skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a  
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If  
acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.  
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories  
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.  
CIMS #72063 com_relearn.03  
itdseq=283  
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,  
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When  
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must  
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and  
performance. To begin this process:  
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.  
2. Put the gearshift lever in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start  
the engine.  
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.  
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.  
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.  
• The vehicle may need to be driven to relearn the idle and fuel trim  
strategy.  
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle  
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle  
trim is eventually relearned.  
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the  
transmission must relearn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the  
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and  
241  
PAGE: 241 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 242 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time the  
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation to its  
optimum shift feel.  
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,  
the clock and the preset radio stations must be reset once the battery is  
reconnected.  
• Always dispose of automotive  
batteries in a responsible manner.  
Follow your local authorized  
standards for disposal. Call your  
local authorized recycling center  
to find out more about recycling  
automotive batteries.  
art=dewmc111_a  
RECYCLE  
CIMS #510581 com_cool.title  
itdseq=284  
ENGINE COOLANT  
CIMS #689984  
Checking engine coolant  
com_check-add-cool.mbs  
itdseq=285  
Your engine’s cooling system has been factory-filled with a 50/50 mixture  
of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant, or an equivalent  
premium engine coolant that meets Mazda specification.  
A 50/50 mixture of distilled water and Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant  
provides:  
• maximum cooling system efficiency.  
• freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).  
• boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).  
• protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.  
• an accurate temperature readout from the engine coolant  
gauge.  
The engine coolant must be maintained at the correct fluid level  
and concentration to work properly. If the engine coolant fluid  
level and concentration is not maintained correctly, damage to  
the engine and cooling system may result.  
242  
PAGE: 242 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 243 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• 2.3L engine  
art=ranmc146_a  
• 3.0L & 4.0L engines  
art=ranmc108_a  
243  
PAGE: 243 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 244 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
When the engine is cold, check the level of the engine coolant in the  
reservoir.  
• The engine coolant should be at the “cold fill level” or within the “cold  
fill range” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir (depending upon  
application).  
• Confirm the color and type of engine coolant before adding, to avoid  
mixing incompatible products.  
• Refer to scheduled maintenance for service interval schedules.  
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your  
vehicle in this chapter.  
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,  
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is  
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding  
engine coolant in this chapter.  
WARNING: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not  
use engine coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid  
outside of its specified function and vehicle location.  
CIMS #691521  
Adding engine coolant  
com_adding-coolant.mbs  
itdseq=286  
Use only Mazda Genuine Engine Coolant or a premium engine  
coolant that meets a Mazda specification.  
• DO NOT USE Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color).  
• DO NOT USE a DEX-COOL௡ engine coolant or an equivalent  
engine coolant.  
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol antifreeze or any engine  
coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze.  
• DO NOT USE supplemental coolant additives in your vehicle.  
These additives may harm your engine’s cooling system.  
• DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your  
vehicle. Make sure the correct coolant is used.  
• DO NOT MIX recycled coolant and conventional coolant  
together in your vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants may harm  
your engine’s cooling system.  
• The use of an improper coolant may harm engine and cooling  
system components and may void the warranty of your vehicle’s  
engine cooling system. If you are unsure which type of coolant  
your vehicle requires, contact your local authorized dealer.  
244  
PAGE: 244 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 245 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer  
fluid reservoir. If engine coolant is sprayed onto the windshield,  
it could make it difficult to see through the windshield.  
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant  
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the  
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.  
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
• Engine coolant concentrations above 60% or below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case of  
emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the  
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of  
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone  
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,  
overheating or freezing.  
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap  
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery  
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and  
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles, which have a  
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to  
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with  
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.  
Note: The 3.0L and 4.0L V6 engines use the overflow system, and the  
2.3L I4 engines use the degas system.  
WARNING: To avoid scalding hot steam or coolant from being  
released from the engine cooling system, never remove the  
reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot. Failure to  
follow this warning may result in damage to the engine’s cooling  
system and possible severe personal injury.  
1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine off and let it cool.  
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly  
turn cap counterclockwise until pressure begins to release.  
3. Step back while the pressure releases.  
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the  
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.  
245  
PAGE: 245 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 246 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see  
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD”  
level on the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow  
system, fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is  
almost full.  
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly  
installed to prevent coolant loss.)  
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration, refer  
to Checking engine coolant. If the concentration is not 50/50  
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the  
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50  
coolant concentration.  
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant  
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If  
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and  
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.  
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per  
month, have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system.  
Your cooling system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low  
level of coolant can result in engine overheating and possible engine  
damage.  
CIMS #691523  
Recycled engine coolant  
com_recycled-coolant.mbs  
itdseq=287  
Not all coolant recycling processes produce coolant which meets Mazda  
specification. Use of a recycled engine coolant which does not meet  
Mazda specifications may harm engine and cooling system components.  
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.  
Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and  
disposing of automotive fluids.  
CIMS #52568  
com_refill-capacity  
itdseq=288  
Coolant refill capacity  
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer  
to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter.  
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant  
in this section.  
CIMS #455269  
com_extreme.climates  
itdseq=289  
Severe climates  
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F [–36° C ]):  
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration  
above 50%.  
246  
PAGE: 246 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 247 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.  
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will  
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the  
winter months.  
If you drive in extremely hot climates:  
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration  
above 40%.  
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.  
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will  
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine  
coolant and may cause engine damage.  
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the  
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate  
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.  
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50  
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system  
and engine protection.  
CIMS #246409 com_fuel.filter  
itdseq=290  
FUEL FILTER  
For fuel filter replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to  
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for  
changing the fuel filter.  
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Mazda part. The  
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system  
if an authorized Mazda fuel filter is not used.  
247  
PAGE: 247 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 248 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #52343  
itdseq=291  
com_fueling  
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS  
Important safety precautions  
CIMS #1512892  
com_fuel-prec.mbs  
itdseq=292  
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an  
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and  
fire.  
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel  
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait  
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.  
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.  
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,  
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system  
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may  
result in possible personal injury.  
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death  
if misused or mishandled.  
WARNING: Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a  
cancer-causing agent.  
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:  
• Extinguish all smoking materials  
and any open flames before  
fueling your vehicle.  
art=f12mc032_a  
• Always turn off the vehicle before  
fueling.  
• Automotive fuels can be harmful  
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if  
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,  
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately  
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.  
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind  
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,  
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious  
illness and permanent injury.  
248  
PAGE: 248 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 249 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,  
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and  
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could  
lead to permanent injury.  
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated  
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or  
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.  
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of  
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,  
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive  
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is  
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and  
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse  
reaction.  
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and  
never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never  
smoke while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under  
certain conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling  
excess fumes.  
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can  
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is  
pumped into an ungrounded fuel container.  
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when  
filling an ungrounded fuel container:  
• Place approved fuel container on  
the ground.  
art=mbsmc001_a  
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while  
it is in the vehicle (including the  
cargo area/pickup bed).  
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while  
filling.  
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill  
position.  
249  
PAGE: 249 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 250 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #918851  
Fuel Filler Cap  
com_fuel.cap.ckfuelcap.mbs  
itdseq=293  
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/4 turn on/off  
feature.  
When fueling your vehicle:  
1. Turn the engine off.  
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/4 of a turn to remove  
it.  
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.  
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the  
filler pipe.  
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/4 of a turn until it clicks at least once.  
The  
ensure your bulb is working. When this light turns on, check the fuel  
filler cap. Continuing to operate the vehicle with on, can activate  
the indicator. When the fuel filler cap is properly re-installed, the  
comes on when the ignition is turned to the ON position to  
light(s) will turn off after a period of normal driving. It may take a long  
period of time for the system to detect an improperly installed  
fuel filler cap.  
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler  
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The warranty may be void  
for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the correct  
genuine Mazda fuel filler cap is not used.  
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel  
filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait  
until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap.  
Otherwise, fuel may spray out and injure you or others.  
WARNING: If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap,  
excessive vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system  
or cause the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may  
result in possible personal injury.  
CIMS #52352  
com_choosing-fuel  
itdseq=294  
Choosing the right fuel  
Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum  
of 10% ethanol. Your vehicle was not designed to run on E85 fuels that  
are blended with a maximum of 85% ethanol. The use of leaded fuel is  
250  
PAGE: 250 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 251 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle. Do not use fuel  
containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system components.  
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic  
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that  
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to  
deteriorate more rapidly.  
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was  
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.  
CIMS #52358 com_clean-air  
itdseq=295  
Cleaner air  
Mazda endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to  
improve air quality, per the recommendations in the Choosing the Right  
Fuel section.  
CIMS #52354  
Octane recommendations  
com_octane-recommend.reg  
itdseq=296  
Your vehicle is designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with  
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.  
art=f12mc033_b  
87  
We do not recommend the use of  
(R+M)/2 METHOD  
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that  
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.  
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if  
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel  
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to  
prevent any engine damage.  
CIMS #52356  
com_fuel-quality  
itdseq=297  
Fuel quality  
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability  
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”  
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use  
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to  
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your authorized  
dealer.  
Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank. It  
should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel  
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane  
rating. These products have not been approved for your engine and  
could cause damage to the fuel system. Repairs to correct the effects of  
using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your  
warranty.  
251  
PAGE: 251 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 252 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter  
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved  
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.  
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when  
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the  
World-wide Fuel Charter.  
CIMS #1511346  
com_no-fuel.iso  
itdseq=298  
Running out of fuel  
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse  
effect on powertrain components.  
If you have run out of fuel:  
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after  
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to  
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer  
than normal.  
• Normally, adding one gallon of fuel is enough to restart the engine. If  
the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than one gallon  
may be required.  
• The  
indicator may come on. For more information on the “check  
engine” or the “service engine soon” indicator, refer to Warning lights  
and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter.  
CIMS #212622  
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY  
com_essentials-fuel.title  
itdseq=299  
CIMS #713069  
Measuring techniques  
com_measuring-tecniks.mbs  
itdseq=300  
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the  
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as  
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fillups or fuel gauge readings are  
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend  
taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600  
km) of driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate  
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).  
CIMS #212766  
com_filling-the-tank  
itdseq=301  
Filling the tank  
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to  
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance  
product specifications and capacities section of this chapter.  
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the  
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the  
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates  
252  
PAGE: 252 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 253 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel  
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.  
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should  
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your  
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be  
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the  
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.  
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:  
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,  
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.  
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time  
the tank is filled.  
• Allow no more than two automatic click-offs when filling.  
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.  
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.  
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the  
same direction each time you fill up.  
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.  
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.  
CIMS #212767  
Calculating fuel economy  
com_calculating-fuel-economy  
itdseq=302  
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading  
(in miles or kilometers).  
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in  
gallons or liters).  
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record  
the current odometer reading.  
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer  
reading.  
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel  
economy:  
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.  
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total  
kilometers traveled.  
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city  
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel  
253  
PAGE: 253 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 254 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records  
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel  
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.  
CIMS #212768  
com_driving-style.title  
itdseq=303  
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits  
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change  
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.  
CIMS #1280386  
com_habits.maz  
itdseq=304  
Habits  
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.  
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel  
economy.  
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste  
fuel.  
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.  
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.  
• Slow down gradually.  
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%  
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).  
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.  
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.  
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if  
unnecessary shifting between fourth and fifth gear occurs.  
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel  
economy.  
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may  
reduce fuel economy.  
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel  
economy.  
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.  
Maintenance  
CIMS #1516191  
com_drvg_style_maint.maz  
itdseq=305  
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.  
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel  
economy.  
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to the Maintenance product  
specifications and capacities section of this chapter.  
254  
PAGE: 254 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 255 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the  
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks  
found in scheduled maintenance.  
CIMS #212936  
com_conditions  
itdseq=306  
Conditions  
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy  
at any speed.  
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately  
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).  
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug  
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may  
reduce fuel economy.  
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.  
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first  
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.  
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to  
driving on hilly terrain.  
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top  
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.  
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than  
two-wheel-drive operation.  
• Close windows for high speed driving.  
EPA window sticker  
CIMS #212938  
com_epa-sticker  
itdseq=307  
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your  
authorized dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle.  
The EPA window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy  
comparisons with other vehicles.  
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window  
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)  
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy  
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.  
CIMS #1221316  
com_emis-ses.maztrk  
itdseq=308  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM  
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a  
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with  
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic  
converter and other emission control components continue to work  
properly:  
255  
PAGE: 255 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 256 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
• Use only the specified fuel listed.  
• Avoid running out of fuel.  
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at  
high speeds.  
• Have the items listed in the scheduled maintenance section  
performed according to the specified schedule.  
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the scheduled maintenance  
section are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to  
its emissions system.  
If other than Mazda authorized parts are used for maintenance  
replacements or for service of components affecting emission control,  
such non-Mazda parts should be equivalent to genuine Mazda parts in  
performance and durability.  
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass  
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the  
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.  
Illumination of the  
indicator, charging system warning light or the  
temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of  
engine power, could indicate that the emission control system is not  
working properly.  
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and  
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.  
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By  
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,  
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not  
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent  
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on  
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the  
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up  
specifications.  
Please consult your “Warranty Information” for complete emission  
warranty information.  
CIMS #1200842  
com_onboard-OBDII  
itdseq=309  
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s  
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On  
256  
PAGE: 256 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 257 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the  
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet  
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your  
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle. When the  
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II system has detected a malfunction.  
Temporary malfunctions may cause the  
Examples are:  
indicator to illuminate.  
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run  
poorly.  
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run  
poorly.  
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened. See Fuel filler  
cap in this chapter.  
4. Driving through deep water – the electrical system may be wet.  
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank  
with good quality fuel, properly tightening the fuel cap or letting the  
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any  
other temporary malfunctions present, the  
indicator should stay off  
the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle consists of a cold  
engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving. No additional  
vehicle service is required.  
If the  
indicator remains on, have your vehicle serviced at the first  
available opportunity. Although some malfunctions detected by the  
OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent, continued driving  
with the  
indicator on can result in increased emissions, lower fuel  
economy, reduced engine and transmission smoothness, and lead to more  
costly repairs.  
CIMS #460104  
com_ready-test.iso  
itdseq=310  
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing  
Some state/provincial and local governments may have  
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control  
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent  
you from getting a vehicle registration. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M  
test if the  
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned  
out), or if the OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission  
control systems have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle  
is considered not ready for I/M testing.  
If the  
indicator is on or the bulb does not work, the vehicle may  
need to be serviced. Refer to the On board diagnostics (OBD-II)  
description in this chapter.  
257  
PAGE: 257 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 258 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the  
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may  
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the  
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the ON position  
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the  
eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if  
the indicator stays on solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for  
indicator blinks  
I/M testing.  
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system  
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the  
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting  
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:  
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20  
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods.  
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the  
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The  
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,  
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If  
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will  
have to be repeated.  
258  
PAGE: 258 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 259 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #76037  
POWER STEERING FLUID  
com_check-steering-fluid.04  
itdseq=311  
• 2.3L I4 engine  
art=ranmc143_a  
art=ranmc155_a  
art=expmc501_a  
• 3.0L V6 engine  
• 4.0L V6 engine  
DR  
O
N
O
LT  
V
E
F
O
I
L
G N  
I
D
I
F
E
R
P
U L  
R
O
E
W
E
T
S
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to the service maintenance section  
for the service interval schedules. If adding fluid is necessary, use only  
MERCON௡ ATF.  
259  
PAGE: 259 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 260 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating  
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be  
near the center of the normal area between H and C).  
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several  
times.  
3. Turn the engine off.  
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN  
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is within this range.  
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, until it reaches  
between the MIN and MAX lines.  
CIMS #1127051  
com_brake_title  
itdseq=312  
BRAKE FLUID  
CIMS #1265242  
com_brake-max.maz  
itdseq=313  
The fluid level will drop slowly as  
the brakes wear, and will rise when  
art=unomc300_a  
the brake components are replaced.  
Fluid levels below the “MAX” line  
that do not trigger the brake system  
warning lamp are within the normal  
operating range, there is no need to  
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,  
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek  
service from your authorized dealer immediately.  
WARNING: Brake fluid is toxic. If brake fluid contacts the  
eyes, flush eyes with running water for 15 minutes. Seek  
medical attention if irritation persists. If taken internally, drink  
water and induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.  
WARNING: If you use a brake fluid that is not DOT 3, you will  
cause permanent damage to your brakes.  
WARNING: Do not let the reservoir for the master cylinder run  
dry. This may cause the brakes to fail.  
260  
PAGE: 260 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 261 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #918853  
com_clutch.truck.mbs  
itdseq=314  
CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)  
Check the fluid level. Refer to scheduled maintenance for the service  
interval schedules.  
During normal operation, the fluid level in the clutch reservoir should  
remain constant. If the fluid level drops, refill the fluid level to the step  
in the reservoir.  
Use only a DOT 3 brake fluid designed to meet Mazda specification.  
Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this  
chapter.  
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product  
label. For MEDICAL EMERGENCY INFORMATION contact a  
physician or Poison Control Center immediately. Failure to  
follow these instructions may result in personal injury.  
1. Clean the reservoir cap before  
removal to prevent dirt and  
water from entering the  
reservoir.  
art=ranmc153_a  
2. Remove cap and rubber  
diaphragm from reservoir.  
3. Add fluid until the level reaches  
the step in the reservoir.  
4. Reinstall rubber diaphragm and  
cap onto reservoir.  
CIMS #80235  
TRANSMISSION FLUID  
com_transmission-fluid  
itdseq=315  
CIMS #953918  
Checking automatic transmission fluid  
com_check_autotran.fly  
itdseq=316  
• Refer to scheduled maintenance information for scheduled check  
and change intervals.  
• Transmission does not consume fluid.  
• Check fluid when transmission is not operating properly or if you see  
a leak.  
• Fluid level must be checked at normal operating temperature, 20 miles  
(30 km) of driving.  
To check and add fluid:  
1. Drive the vehicle 20 miles (30 km) to reach normal operating  
temperatures.  
261  
PAGE: 261 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 262 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
2. If driven in hot weather, city traffic, pulling a trailer, allow  
transmission to cool for 30 minutes before checking.  
3. Engage parking brake, start engine.  
4. Put your foot on the brake pedal and move the gearshift lever slowly  
through all of the gear ranges.  
5. Shift to P (Park) and leave the engine running.  
6. Remove the dipstick, wipe clean with a dry lint free rag.  
7. Install and fully seat the dipstick into the filler tube.  
8. Remove the dipstick and inspect  
the fluid level. Level should be  
in the cross-hatched area.  
art=ranmc130_a  
9. If necessary, add fluid in 1/2 pint (250ml) increments through the  
filler tube until the level is correct at normal operating temperatures.  
Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities  
section in this chapter for the correct fluid type. The use of any  
other non-approved fluid may cause internal transmission damage.  
10. Fluid can be checked at ambient  
temperatures between 50–95°F  
art=ranmc131_a  
(10–30°C). DO NOT ADD fluid  
until the transmission is at  
normal operating temperatures or the transmission will be overfilled.  
CIMS #953919  
com_trans-level.fly  
itdseq=317  
Low fluid level  
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid  
level is at or below the bottom of  
the dipstick.  
art=ranmc129_b  
High fluid level  
Fluid levels above the safe range  
may cause overheating, shift and/or  
engagement concerns and internal  
transmission damage. If an overfill  
condition occurs, excess fluid should  
be removed by an authorized dealer.  
art=ranmc132_a  
262  
PAGE: 262 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 263 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #1126961  
com_chk-man-trans.maz  
itdseq=318  
Checking and adding manual transmission fluid (if equipped)  
1. Park the vehicle on a level  
surface.  
art=mbsmc002_a  
2. Engage the parking brake fully –  
put in first gear.  
3. Ensure that the vehicle cannot  
move.  
4. Clean the filler plug.  
5. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
6. Fluid level should be at the  
bottom of the opening.  
art=f23mc115_a  
7. Add enough fluid through the  
filler opening so that the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the  
opening.  
8. Install and tighten the fill plug  
securely.  
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this  
chapter.  
263  
PAGE: 263 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 264 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #918861  
TRANSFER CASE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED)  
com_check-add-tcase.mbs  
itdseq=319  
1. Park the vehicle on a level  
surface.  
art=ranmc128_d  
2. Engage the parking brake fully –  
put in first gear.  
3. Ensure the vehicle cannot move.  
4. Clean the filler plug.  
5. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
6. Fluid level should be at the  
bottom of the opening.  
art=f12mc022_a  
7. Add enough fluid through the  
filler opening so that the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the  
opening.  
8. Install and tighten the fill plug  
securely.  
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this  
chapter.  
CIMS #918862  
DRIVELINE UNIVERSAL JOINT AND SLIP YOKE  
com_serv-shaft-yoke.mbs  
itdseq=320  
Your vehicle may be equipped with universal joints that require  
lubrication. If the original universal joints are replaced with universal  
joints equipped with grease fittings, lubrication will also be necessary.  
264  
PAGE: 264 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 265 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CHECKING AND ADDING REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID  
1. Park the vehicle on a level  
surface.  
art=mbsmc003_a  
2. Engage the parking brake fully –  
put in first gear.  
3. Assure the vehicle cannot move.  
4. Clean the filler plug.  
5. Remove the filler plug and  
inspect the fluid level.  
6. Fluid level should be at the  
bottom of the opening.  
art=f12mc022_a  
7. Add enough fluid through the  
filler opening so that the fluid  
level is at the bottom of the  
opening.  
8. Install and tighten the fill plug  
securely.  
Use only fluid that meets Mazda specifications. Refer to the  
Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this  
chapter.  
265  
PAGE: 265 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MAINTENANCE PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES  
2
R
Mazda part name or  
Item  
Application  
Capacity  
B
equivalent  
High Performance DOT 3  
Motor Vehicle Brake  
Fluid  
C
Brake fluid and clutch  
fluid (if equipped)  
Between MIN and MAX  
All  
All  
1
on reservoir  
(mbs)  
Door weather strips  
Hinges, door checks,  
latches, striker plates,  
fuel filler door hinge  
and seat tracks  
Silicone Lubricant  
—
O
All  
Multi-Purpose Grease  
—
Guide  
Transmission  
/steering/parking brake  
linkages and pivots,  
brake and clutch pedal  
shaft, clutch pilot  
bearing and input shaft  
spline (manual  
(post-2002-fmt)  
Premium Long-Life  
Grease  
All  
—
transmission)  
(own2002)  
Market:  
USA  
(fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mazda part name or  
equivalent  
2
R
Item  
Application  
Capacity  
B
2.3 L I4 engine  
with manual  
10.5 quarts (10.0L)  
C
transmission  
2.3L I4 engine  
with automatic  
transmission  
3.0L V6 engine  
with manual  
(mbs)  
10.2 quarts (9.7L)  
15.1 quarts (14.3L)  
14.8 quarts (14.0L)  
13.7 quarts (13.0L)  
13.2 quarts (12.5L)  
O
transmission  
Premium Engine  
Coolant2  
Guide  
Engine coolant  
3.0L V6 engine  
with automatic  
transmission  
4.0L V6 engine  
with manual  
(post-2002-fmt)  
transmission  
4.0L V6 engine  
with automatic  
transmission  
(own2002)  
2.3L I4 engine  
3.0L V6 engine  
4.0L V6 engine  
4.0 quarts (3.8L)  
4.5 quarts (4.3L)  
5.0 quarts (4.7L)  
SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil  
SAE 5W-30 Motor Oil  
Engine oil  
Market:  
USA  
(fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mazda part name or  
equivalent  
2
R
Item  
Application  
All  
Capacity  
i
Fill between MAX / MIN  
line on reservoir  
Power steering fluid  
Y
Transfer case fluid  
(4X4)  
Manual transmission  
fluid  
4x4 Vehicles  
5-speed manual  
MERCON௡ ATF  
1.25 quarts (1.2L)  
2.8 quarts (2.65L)3  
9.9 quarts (9.4L)5  
(mbs)  
O
4x2 vehicles with  
2.3L I4 engine  
4x2 vehicles with  
3.0L or 4.0L  
engines  
4x4 vehicles with  
3.0L or 4.0L  
engines  
Guide  
Automatic transmission  
fluid (5R44E and  
5R55E)  
10.0 quarts (9.5L)5  
MERCON௡V ATF4  
(post-2002-fmt)  
5
10.3 quarts (9.8L)  
SAE 80W-90 Premium  
Rear Axle Lubricant  
SAE 80W-90 Premium  
Rear Axle Lubricant  
Ultra-clear Windshield  
Washer Concentrate  
Front axle fluid (4X4)  
Rear axle fluid  
4x4 Vehicles  
3.6 pints (1.7L)  
5.0-5.3 pints (2.4-2.5L)6  
2.75 quarts (2.6L)  
(own2002)  
All  
All  
Windshield washer fluid  
Market:  
USA  
(fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mazda part name or  
equivalent  
2
R
Item  
Application  
Capacity  
B
Regular cab  
(Short wheel  
base)  
17 gallons (64.4L)  
19.5 gallons (73.8L)  
C
Fuel tank  
—
Cab Plus 4  
(mbs)  
1Brake fluid will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when brake components are replaced.  
Fluid levels below the MAX line that do not trigger the brake warning light are within the normal  
operating range, there is no need to add fluid. If the levels are outside the normal operating range,  
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek service from your authorized  
dealer immediately.  
O
2Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Do not mix different colors or types of  
coolant. Do not use Mazda Extended Life Engine Coolant (orange in color). Refer to Adding  
engine coolant, in this chapter.  
3Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with  
the vehicle on a level surface.  
Guide  
(post-2002-fmt)  
4Automatic transmissions that require MERCON௡ V should only use MERCON௡ V fluid or fluid that  
is specified dual usage MERCON௡/ MERCON௡ V. Refer to scheduled maintenance to determine  
the correct service interval. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause  
transmission damage.  
(own2002)  
5Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and  
if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set  
by the indication on the dipstick’s normal operating range.  
6Traction-Lok axles use 4.75–5.0 pints (2.2–2.4L) of rear axle lubricant. Add 4 oz. (118 ml) of  
Additive Friction Modifier meeting Mazda specifications for complete refill of Traction-Lok axles.  
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch (6 mm to 14  
mm) below the bottom of the filler hole.  
Market:  
USA  
If submerged in water, the rear axle lubricant should be changed.  
(fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 270 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #716286  
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS  
com_data.mazda  
CIMS #685183 com_data.mbs  
itdseq=322  
itdseq=323  
Engine  
2.3L I4 engine 3.0L V6 engine 4.0L V6 engine  
Cubic inches  
Required fuel  
Firing order  
138  
87 octane  
1-3-4-2  
182  
87 octane  
1-4-2-5-3-6  
245  
87 octane  
1-4-2-5-3-6  
Spark plug gap 0.049–0.053 inch 0.051–0.057 inch 0.052–0.056 inch  
(1.25–1.35mm) (1.29–1.45mm) (1.32–1.42mm)  
Ignition system EDIS  
EDIS  
9.6:1  
EDIS  
9.7:1  
Compression  
ratio  
9.7:1  
CIMS #1549961  
com_acc-belt.ran.mbs  
itdseq=324  
Engine drivebelt routing  
art=ranmc203_a  
• 2.3L I4 Engine without A/C (with A/C similar)  
art=ranmc202_a  
• 3.0L V6 Engine without A/C  
270  
PAGE: 270 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 271 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
art=ranmc201_a  
• 3.0L V6 Engine with A/C  
art=ranmc200_a  
• 4.0L V6 Engine  
271  
PAGE: 271 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 272 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE  
CIMS #52653  
com_vehicle-info.01  
itdseq=325  
CIMS #80651  
itdseq=326  
com_vinplate  
Safety Compliance Certification Label  
The National Highway Traffic Safety  
Administration Regulations require  
that a Safety Compliance  
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.  
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION  
art=mazmc001_a  
DATE: XX/XX  
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG  
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL  
XXXXKG  
REAR GAWR:  
XXXXKG  
XXXXLB  
WITH  
TIRES  
WITH  
TIRES  
RIMS  
Certification Label be affixed to a  
vehicle and prescribe where the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label may be located. The Safety  
Compliance Certification Label is  
located on the structure (B-Pillar)  
by the trailing edge of the driver’s  
door or the edge of the driver’s  
door.  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
RIMS  
PSI COLD  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR  
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN  
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.  
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
TYPE: XXX  
XXXXX  
XXXXX  
EXT PNT:  
WB BRK INT TR TP/PS  
XXX XX  
XX  
RC: XX  
AXLE  
XX  
DSO:  
R
X
TR SPR  
XXXXX  
XXX  
X
X
XX  
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX  
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX  
CIMS #72686  
Vehicle identification number (VIN)  
com_vin-numbers.02  
itdseq=327  
The vehicle identification number is  
located on the driver side  
instrument panel.  
art=navmc710_a  
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
Please note that in the graphic,  
XXXX is representative of your  
vehicle identification number.  
272  
PAGE: 272 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 273 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Maintenance and Specifications  
CIMS #734836  
com_vin-info.all  
itdseq=328  
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following  
information:  
1. World manufacturer identifier  
art=204mc036_a  
2. Brake system / Gross Vehicle  
Weight Rating (GVWR) /  
Restraint System  
3. Vehicle line, series, body type  
4. Engine type  
5. Check digit  
6. Model year  
7. Assembly plant  
8. Production sequence number  
CIMS #1519411  
com_trans-code.maz  
itdseq=329  
TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE CODE DESIGNATIONS  
You can find a  
MFD. BY FORD MOTOR CO. IN U.S.A.  
FOR MAZDA MOTOR CORPORATION  
transmission/transaxle code on the  
Safety Compliance Certification  
Label . The following table tells you  
which transmission or transaxle  
each code represents.  
art=mazmc000_a  
DATE: XX/XX  
GVWR:XXXXXLB/ XXXXXKG  
FRONT GAWR: XXXXL  
XXXXKG  
REAR GAWR:  
XXXXKG  
XXXXLB  
WITH  
TIRES  
WITH  
TIRES  
RIMS  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
XXXX/XXXXXXX  
XXXX.XX  
RIMS  
PSI COLD  
AT XXX kPa/XX  
PSI COLD  
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR  
VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN  
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.  
VIN: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX  
TYPE: XXX  
XXXXX  
XXXXX  
EXT PNT:  
WB BRK INT TR  
XXX XX  
XX  
RC: XX  
AXLE  
XX  
DSO:  
TP/PS  
R
X
TR SPR  
XXXXX  
XXX  
X
X
XX  
XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX  
XXXX-XXXXXXX-XX  
CIMS #1466219  
com_trans-code.ran  
itdseq=330  
Description  
Code  
Five-speed automatic (5R44E/5R55E)  
Five-speed manual (HD)  
Five-speed manual (R1)  
D
J
R
273  
PAGE: 273 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 274 SESS: 1 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Accessories  
CIMS #913856  
CELL PHONES  
com_cell_phone-mazda  
itdseq=331  
Use of cell phones and other devices by driver:  
WARNING: Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones,  
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices  
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing a  
number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver’s  
hands. Use of these devices will cause the driver to be  
distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a passenger is  
unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area  
before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this  
warning, use a hands-free system to at least allow the hands  
free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other  
electrical device while the vehicle is moving and, instead,  
concentrate on the full-time job of driving.  
In addition, the gasoline distributors are warning against using  
cell phones during refueling procedures, due to their increased  
concern about static electricity fires in the self-service pump  
environment.  
274  
PAGE: 274 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 1 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 275 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Index  
A
servicing ..................................240  
BeltMinder௡ .................................86  
ABS (see Brakes) .....................158  
Brakes ........................................158  
anti-lock ...........................158–159  
anti-lock brake system (ABS)  
warning light ...........................159  
fluid, checking and adding ....260  
fluid, specifications .................266  
lubricant specifications ..........266  
parking ....................................160  
shift interlock ..........................162  
Airbag supplemental restraint  
system ..........................................91  
and child safety seats ..............94  
description ................................91  
disposal ......................................96  
driver airbag ........................91, 94  
indicator light ...........................95  
operation .............................91, 94  
passenger airbag .................91, 94  
Break-in period .............................5  
Bulbs ............................................50  
Ambulance packages ....................7  
Antifreeze (see Engine  
coolant) .....................................242  
C
Anti-lock brake system (see  
Brakes) ..............................158–159  
Cargo cage ...................................63  
Cell phone warning ...................274  
Changing a tire .........................186  
Anti-theft system ........................70  
Audio system  
Single CD ..................................21  
Child safety restraints ..............100  
child safety belts ....................100  
Audio system (see Radio) ..19, 21,  
24, 29, 32  
Child safety seats ......................103  
attaching with tether straps ..107  
in front seat ............................104  
in rear seat ..............................104  
tether anchorage hardware ...107  
Automatic transmission ............162  
driving an automatic  
overdrive .................................163  
fluid, specification ..................266  
Auxiliary Input Jack ...................37  
Auxiliary power point .................58  
Chimes (warning) .......................17  
Cleaning your vehicle  
engine compartment ..............215  
instrument panel ....................218  
interior .....................................218  
interior trim ............................218  
Mazda car care products .......219  
plastic parts ............................217  
washing ....................................214  
waxing .....................................214  
wheels ......................................215  
wiper blades ............................217  
Axle  
lubricant specifications ..........266  
traction lok ..............................161  
B
Battery .......................................240  
acid, treating emergencies .....240  
jumping a disabled battery ....196  
maintenance-free ....................240  
275  
PAGE: 275 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 276 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Index  
Clock adjust  
Emission control system ..........255  
AM/FM Stereo ...........................19  
AM/FM stereo CD ...............21, 24  
Premium AM/FM stereo  
Engine ........................................270  
cleaning ...................................215  
coolant .....................................242  
idle speed control ...................240  
lubrication specifications .......266  
service points ..................230–232  
starting after a collision .........175  
CD6/MP3 .............................29, 33  
Single CD ..................................21  
Clutch  
fluid ..........................................261  
operation while driving ..........166  
recommended shift speeds ....166  
Engine block heater .................157  
Console ........................................58  
Engine oil ..................................234  
checking and adding ..............234  
dipstick ....................................234  
filter, specifications ................238  
recommendations ...................238  
specifications ..........................266  
Coolant  
checking and adding ..............242  
refill capacities ........................246  
specifications ..........................266  
Cruise control (see Speed  
control) ........................................60  
Exhaust fumes ..........................157  
Customer Assistance .......203–204,  
206  
F
Foglamps .....................................46  
D
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......168  
driving off road .......................170  
electronic shift ........................169  
indicator light .........................168  
preparing to drive your  
Daytime running lamps (see  
Lamps) .........................................47  
Dipstick  
engine oil .................................234  
vehicle .....................................161  
Driveline universal joint and  
slip yoke ....................................264  
Fuel ............................................248  
calculating fuel economy .......252  
cap ...........................................250  
choosing the right fuel ...........250  
comparisons with EPA fuel  
economy estimates .................255  
detergent in fuel .....................251  
filling your vehicle with fuel .248,  
250, 252  
filter, specifications ................247  
fuel pump shut-off switch .....175  
improving fuel economy ........252  
octane rating ...................251, 270  
quality ......................................251  
Driving under special  
conditions ..................168, 171, 173  
mud ..........................................172  
sand .........................................172  
snow and ice ...........................173  
through water .................172, 174  
E
Emergencies, roadside  
jump-starting ..........................196  
Emergency Flashers .................175  
276  
PAGE: 276 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 277 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Index  
running out of fuel .................252  
safety information relating to  
automotive fuels .....................248  
location of components ............12  
J
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......175  
Fuses ..................................176–177  
Jack ............................................186  
positioning ...............................186  
storage .............................186, 189  
G
Jump-starting your vehicle ......196  
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............250  
Gas mileage (see Fuel  
economy) ...................................252  
K
Keys .......................................66, 71  
positions of the ignition .........154  
Gauges .........................................17  
L
H
Lamps  
bulb replacement  
Hazard flashers .........................175  
Headlamps ...................................46  
aiming ........................................47  
bulb specifications ....................50  
daytime running lights .............47  
flash to pass ..............................47  
high beam .................................46  
replacing bulbs .........................51  
turning on and off ....................46  
specifications chart ..................50  
daytime running light ...............47  
fog lamps ...................................46  
headlamps .................................46  
headlamps, flash to pass ..........47  
instrument panel, dimming .....47  
interior lamps .....................50–51  
replacing bulbs .........................51  
Heating  
Lane change indicator (see  
heating and air conditioning  
system .................................43–44  
Turn signal) .................................49  
Lights, warning and indicator ....12  
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........159  
Hood ..........................................229  
Load limits .................................135  
Loading instructions .................142  
I
Ignition ...............................154, 270  
Infant seats (see Safety seats) 103  
Locks  
doors ..........................................66  
Lubricant specifications ...........266  
Lug nuts ....................................195  
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)  
testing ........................................257  
Instrument panel  
M
cleaning ...................................218  
cluster ........................................12  
lighting up panel and interior .47  
Manual transmission .................166  
277  
PAGE: 277 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 278 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Index  
lubricant specifications ..........266  
reverse .....................................167  
Mirrors .........................................60  
fold away ...................................60  
side view mirrors (power) .......60  
locking/unlocking doors ...........67  
panic alarm ...............................67  
replacing the batteries .............67  
S
Motorcraft parts ........................247  
Safety Belt Maintenance ............84  
Safety belts (see Safety  
restraints) ........................75, 79–83  
O
Octane rating ............................251  
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................234  
Overdrive .....................................63  
Overheating ...............................195  
Safety restraints ..............75, 79–83  
BeltMinder௡ ..............................86  
extension assembly ..................84  
for adults .............................80–82  
for children .......................99–100  
Occupant Classification  
Sensor ........................................77  
safety belt maintenance ...........84  
warning light and chime ..........85  
P
Parking brake ............................160  
Safety restraints - tether  
anchors ......................................107  
Passenger Occupant  
Classification Sensor ...................77  
Safety seats for children ..........103  
Power distribution box (see  
Fuses) ........................................180  
Safety Compliance  
Certification Label ....................272  
Power door locks ........................66  
Power mirrors .............................60  
Power point .................................58  
Satellite Radio Information ........39  
Seat belts (see Safety  
restraints) ....................................75  
Power steering ..........................161  
fluid, checking and adding ....259  
fluid, specifications .................266  
Seats ............................................73  
child safety seats ....................103  
SecuriLock passive anti-theft  
Power Windows ...........................59  
Preparing to drive your vehicle 161  
system ..........................................70  
Servicing your vehicle ..............228  
R
Setting the clock  
AM/FM stereo ...........................19  
AM/FM stereo CD ...............21, 24  
Premium AM/FM stereo  
Radio ....................19, 21, 24, 29, 32  
Single CD ..................................21  
CD6/MP3 .............................29, 33  
Relays ........................................176  
Snowplowing .................................7  
Spark plugs, specifications .......270  
Remote entry system .................67  
illuminated entry ......................69  
278  
PAGE: 278 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
JOBNAME: No Job Name PAGE: 279 SESS: 3 OUTPUT: Thu Aug 3 11:45:36 2006  
/ford_pdm/ford/own2002/mbs/og  
Index  
Special notice  
ambulance conversions ..............7  
utility-type vehicles ....................6  
recreational towing .................151  
trailer towing ..........................142  
wrecker ....................................202  
Traction-lok rear axle ...............161  
Specification chart, lubricants .266  
Speed control ..............................60  
Transfer case  
fluid checking .........................264  
Starting your vehicle .......154–155,  
157  
jump starting ..........................196  
Transmission  
automatic operation ...............162  
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....162  
fluid, checking and adding  
Steering wheel  
tilting .........................................58  
(manual) .................................263  
lubricant specifications ..........266  
manual operation ....................166  
Stereo  
Single CD ..................................21  
Turn signal ..................................49  
T
V
Tether anchors ..........................107  
Tilt steering wheel ......................58  
Vehicle Identification Number  
(VIN) ..........................................272  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS)  
Roadside Emergencies ...........186  
Tires, Wheels and Loading ....130  
Vehicle loading ..........................135  
camper bodies ........................153  
Ventilating your vehicle ...........157  
Tires ...........................113–114, 186  
alignment ................................122  
care ..........................................117  
changing ..........................186, 191  
checking the pressure ............117  
inflating ...................................115  
label .........................................129  
replacing ..................................119  
rotating ....................................122  
safety practices .......................121  
sidewall information ...............124  
snow tires and chains ............135  
spare tire .........................187, 189  
terminology .............................114  
tire grades ...............................114  
treadwear ........................113, 118  
W
Warning chimes ...........................17  
Warning lights (see Lights) .......12  
Washer fluid ..............................233  
Water, Driving through .............174  
Windows  
power .........................................59  
Windshield washer fluid and  
wipers ..........................................57  
checking and adding fluid .....233  
checking and cleaning ............233  
replacing wiper blades ...........234  
Towing .......................................142  
Wrecker towing .........................202  
279  
PAGE: 279 OP: root EDIT SESSION: 3 DATE: AUG 3 2006 at 11:45 JOB: @ibm2/ford_pdm/CLS_ford/GRP_own2002/JOB_mbs/DIV_og  
REVIEW COPY ——  
2007 B-Series (mbs), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002), Market: USA (fus)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Lasko Fan 2530 User Manual
Lathem Time Clock LT Series User Manual
Lenmar Enterprises Battery Charger BCUNI User Manual
LG Electronics DVD Player DVX642H User Manual
Linear Home Security System CCM 2 User Manual
Linear Satellite Radio 3060 User Manual
Magellan GPS Receiver 1400 User Manual
McCulloch Portable Generator 7096 FG3006 User Manual
Memorex TV DVD Combo MVDT2002A User Manual
Mercury Marine Marine Instruments 90 899883399 User Manual